Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Students can Download Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the tag to which the attribute frame is associated.
Answer:
<Table>
Frame attribute specifies the border lines around the table. Possible values are void, box, above, below, hsides, Hsides, Lhs, Rhs Eg. <Table Frame = “below”>

Question 2.
The tag used to create combo in HTML is______.
Answer:
<Select>

Question 3.
The option attribute is associated with_____<tag>
Answer:
<Select>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 4.
Consider the following. <FRAMESET Cols= “50 %,*”>
What will be the output of the above HTML statement?
Answer:
It divides browser window with frames of equal width in column wise.

Frame 1Frame 2

Question 5.
Consider the following. <FRAMESET Rows= “50%,*”>
What will be the output of the above HTML statement?
Answer:
It divides browser window into two frames in row wise equally.

Frame 1
Frame 2

Question 6.
<Select> Tag create____in HTML.
Answer:
Combo box

Question 7.
The default align value for a table is_____.
(a) Left
(b) Right
(c) Center
(d) Justify
Answer:
(a) Left

Question 8.
A submit button can be created by_____tag.
(a) <SUBMIT>
(b) <INPUT>
(c) <SELECT>
(d) <ACTION>
Answer:
(b) <INPUT>

Question 9.
_____Tag enclosed the heading cells in a table.
(a) <TABLE>
(b) <TR>
(c) <TH>
(d) <TD>
Answer:
(c) <TH>

Question 10.
_____is an empty tag.
(a) <FRAME>
(b) <FORM>
(c) <FRAMESET
(d) <TABLE>
Answer:
(a) <FRAME>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 11.
Pick the odd one out. Justify your answer
(a) NOFRAME
(b) Body
(c) SRC
(d) HEAD
Answer:
(c) SRC. It is an attribute. All other are tags.

Question 12.
Name the tag which is used as an attribute to another tag?
Answer:
<Center>or<Frame>

Question 13.
The borderlines around a table is specified by_____Attribute.
(a) Frame
(b) cell border
(c) Background
(d) Border
Answer:
(b) Bonder

Question 14.
To change the background colour of a table, which attribute of <table>tag is used for this purpose.
Answer:
BGCOLOR – This attribute specifies the background colour of the table.
<TABLE BORDER=2 BGCOLOR= “Blue”>

Question 15.
Which tag is used to divide the window more than one?
Answer:
<Frameset>

Question 16.
____tag is used to pass information from web viewers to web server.
Answer:
<Form>

Question 17.
_____tag provides a label forthe form control.
Answer:
<Label>

Question 18.
A____has no <body> section.
Answer:
<Frameset> tag

Question 19.
A <frameset> tag no____tag.
Answer:
<Body> tag

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 20.
Name the attribute used to merge two or more rows of a table in an HTML document.
Answer:
Rowspan.

Question 21.
In HTML_____tag is used to create a row in a table
Answer:
<TR>

Question 22.
The space between the border of the cell and its content can be adjusted by an attribute of the <TABLE> tag. Identify this attribute.
Answer:
Cell padding

Question 23.
Give the value of the frame attribute of <TABLE> tag to get the outer border only.
Answer:
box

Question 24.
Baiju wants to place a picture in a table cell. Which attribute of the < TD > tag will be used for this.
Answer:
Back ground.

Question 25.
_____tag forms the definition term in a definition list.
(a) <DD>
(b) <DT>
(c) <DL>
(d) <DR>
Answer:
(b) <DT>

Question 26.
Name the possible values of type attribute of UnOrdered list.
Answer:
tag <UL> can take values square, circle or disc.

Question 27.
To create a list using Uppercase letters use_____?
Answer:
<OLType=”A”>

Question 28.
To create a list using Lower case letters use_____?
Answer:
<OLType=”a”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 29.
To start a list from the count of 3 using______?
Answer:
<OL start=”3”>

Question 30.
Mr. Suresh wants to prepare a list of students with register number. But he wants to start numbering from 5? How can it be done using HTML?
Answer:
Ordered list is used for this <OL start = “5”>

Question 31.
Pick the wrong one from the statements given below:
(A) <OL>and <UL> have Type attribute
(B) Default numbering scheme in <OL> is 1,2, 3…
(C) In Definition List, <DD> tag is used to give definition of terms
(D) Start attribute of ordered list should always be set to 1
Answer:
(D) Start attribute of ordered list should always be set to 1

Question 32.
Which of the following is the correct way to create an email link?
(A) <A href= “abc@xyz”>
(B) <mail href= “abc@xyz”>
(C) <mail> “abc@xyz”>
(D) <A href= “mailto: abc@xyz”>
Answer:
(D) <A href= “mailto: abc@xyz”>

Question 33.
There are two web pages in the class project created by Mathew. The second page should appear in the browser when clicked at a particular text in the first page. What do you call this feature? Name the tag and attribute needed for creating such a feautre.
Answer:
This feature is called link
Tag used is <A> and attribute is HREF

Question 34.
Observe the table with two rows. Which of the following is used with TD tag to merge the cells C and D?

AB
CD

(A) Merge=colspan 2
(B) Rowspan= “2”.
(C) Colspan= “2”
(D) Merge=raw2
Answer:
(C) Colspan= “2”

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 35.
Why do we use <NOFRAME> tag?
Answer:
<NOFRAME> tag is used to give a content when some browser that does not support frameset.

Question 36.
Which of the following tag is used to create a list box in a html Form?
(a) <SUBMIT>
(b) <INPUT>
(c) <SELECT>
(d) <ACTION>
Answer:
(c) <SELECT>

Question 37.
The tag used for creating a drop-down list in HTML is_____.
Answer:
<select> tag

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Manju wants to display 3 web pages on the same screen horizontally. Which HTML statements can be used for this?
Answer:
<Frameset Rows=“33%, *, * ” >
<Frame SRC = Page1. html>
<Frame SRC = Page2. html>
<Frame SRC = Page3. html>
< / Frameset >

Question 2.
Adithya College of Engineering wants to Create their web site, in which the home page is to be designed as a combination of two Vertical panes.

  1. Suggest suitable tags used for this.
  2. Write the HTML statements to get this type of page.

Answer:
1. < Frame set > and < Frame > tags

2. < Frameset cols = “ 50%, * ” >
< Frame SRC = “ Page1. HTML ” >
< Frame SRC = “ Page2. HTML ” >
< / Frameset >

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 3.
‘Kerala Communication channel’ conduct a TV program based on Education policies of Kerala Govt. They want to take the feed back from the viewers through their website.

  1. While creating this site, which type of tag is used to accept multiple line of text from the viewers.
  2. Name any two attributes of this tag.

Answer:

  1. < TEXTAREA>
  2. Cols, rows, name

Question 4.
Distinguish between cellspacing and cellpadding attribute of <Table> tag.
Answer:

  1. Cellspacing: it specifies the space between two table cells.
  2. Cellpadding: It specifies the space between cell border and content.

Question 5.
Match the following

Group AGroup B
<TABLE>HREF
<HTML>DIR
<IMG>BORDER
 <A>SRC
TYPE

Answer:

Group AGroup B
<TABLE>BORDER
<HTML>DIR
<IMG>SRC
 <A>HREF

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 6.
Differentiate <frame> and <frameset> tags.
Answer:
The <frameset> tag defines the frame sections and the <frame> tag specifies the pages to be loaded in each frame
<FRAMESET> tag And <FRAME>tag
Attributes of <FRAMESET>

  • Rows: Used to divide screen in row wise
  • Cols: Used to divide screen in column wise
  • Attributes of <FRAME>
  • SRC: Specifies name of web page to be loaded in Frame
  • Scrolling: Enables the webpage displayed to be scrolled

Eg. <FRAMESETCols= “50%,*”>
<FRAME SRC= “page1.html>
<FRAME SRC= “page2.htmr>
</FRAMESET>

Question 7.
How can you merge cells in a table?
Answer:
By using attributes Colspan or Rowspan

  1. Colspan : It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of columns.
    Eg: <TD Colspan=3> spans the cell over three columns
  2. Rowspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of rows.
    Eg: <TD Rowspan=3> spans the cell over three rows.

Question 8.
Raju created a web page as follows:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 1
But he is unable to view any tabular format in the web page, when it is displayed in the browser. Find the reason for it and correct the same.
Answer:
Without “Border” attribute it never shows tabular form, Border attribute is missing.
<TABLE BORDER=3>

Question 9.
Name the possible values of type attribute of Ordered list.
Answer:
The tag <OL> can take Values as follows

  1. type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,….
  2. type = i for i, ii, iii,….
  3. type = I for I, II, III,…..
  4. type = a for a, b, c,…
  5. type = A for A, B, C,……

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 10.
Predict the output of the following HTML segment.
<OL Type = “1 ” start = “5”>
<Li> Chocolate</Li>
<Li> Milk </Li>
<Li> Coffee</Li>
</OL>
Answer:
5. Chocolate
6. Milk
7. Coffee

Question 11.
Compare the use of Type attribute in Ordered and Unordered list in HTML?
Answer:
1. Unordered List (<UL>): Items are displayed with square, circle or disc in front.
Eg: <UL TYPE=” circle”>

2. Ordered List (<OL>): Items are displayed with the following type values.
Type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,…….
Type = i for i, ii, iii,…..
Type = I for I, ll, III,…..
Type = a for a, b, c,…..
Type = A for A, B, C,…..
Eg: <OL TYPE=”A”>

Question 12.
Differentiate internal linking and external linking with examples.
Answer:

  1. External Linking -: Used to connect two different web pages
    Eg:<A href = “School. html’> School</A>
  2. Internal linking: Internal links are given to a sec¬tion in the same document.
    <A href =“#top”>Goto Top </A>
    <A href = “#bottom>Goto Bottom </A>

Question 13.
While moving the mouse pointer over a web page, the mouse pointer changes its shape to hand icon symbol.

  1. Give reason for this change in mouse pointer.
  2. Name the tag and attributes used for it.

Answer:

  1. It is a hyper link
  2. <A> tag, href attribute.

Question 14.
HTML has facility to provide external and internal hyperlinks.

  1. Which tag is used to include a hyper link?
  2. Explain two attributes needed for creating internal hyperlink.

Answer:

  1. <A>
  2. name, href

Question 15.
Match the following.

EMBEDhref
OLloop
Astart
BGSOUNDhidden

Answer:
EMBED-hidden, OL-start, A-href, BGSOUND- loop

Question 16.
Categorize the following tags into containertags and empty tags,
<A>, <FRAME>, <FRAMESET>, <INPUT>
Answer:

  1. Empty tags:
    <FRAME>& <INPUT>
  2. Container tags:
    <FRAMESET> & <A>

Question 17.
The <FORM> tag is used to accept data and communicate with a server program.

  1. Name any two attributes of FORM tag.
  2. How will you create a “SUBMIT” button and a “RESET” button within the FORM tag?

Answer:

  1. Action, Method
  2. <INPUT Type=“submit”>
    <INPUT Type=“reset”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 18.
Aliya wants to display three webpages (A.htm, B.htm, C.htm) on the same screen horizontally at the ratio 20%, 40%, 40%. Write the HTML code for the same.
Answer:
<FRAMESET ROWS=”20%,40%,40%”>
<FRAME Src= “A.htm”>
<FRAME Src= “B.htm”>
<FRAME Src= “C.htm”>
</FRAMESET >

Question 19.
Distinguish Cellspacing and Cellpadding attributes of<TABLE> tag.
Answer:

  • Cell spacing: Specifies space between table cells
  • Cell padding: Specifies space between cell border and content.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Point out the difference between relative and absolute URL.
Answer:
URL means uniform Resource Locator.
Two type of URL
1. Relative URL: Here we explicitly give the web site address
Eg: <Ahref=http://www.hscap,kerala.gov.in>

2. Absolute URL: Here we implicitly give the web site address. The path is not specified here.
Eg: Consider the web pages index.html and school.html saved in the folder C:\BVM.The file indexs.html contains the following.

<A href-’school.htmr’>. Here we did not specify the full path of the file school.html. But this implicitly points to the file stored in C:\BVM.

Question 2.
Name the tag which is used to play the music in background while the webpage is being viewed.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 2
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 3

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 3.
Differentiate <FRAME>, <FRAMESET> and <NOFRAME>tags.
Answer:

  1. <FRAMESET> tag is used to divide the window more than one pane. It has no body section.
  2. <FRAME>. It specifies the pages within a frameset.
  3. <NOFRAME>. <NOFRAME> tag is used to give a content when some browser that does not support frameset.

Question 4.
In a web page, user needs to enter the address of persons. Name the tag used for this. List and explain any two main attributes of it.
Answer:
<TEXTAREA>. This is used to enter multiple lines in a. Text Box of a web page. Main attributes are:

  • Rows: Specifies the height of text area control, ie. The number of Lines the Text Area should have
  • Cols: Specifies width ie number of characters per line. Name: Gives a variable name to the Text Area control. Eg: <TEXTAREA Name=”Address” Cols=20 Rows=5>

Question 5.
Consider the following table.

BatchBoysGirls
Science2526
Commerce2030

Write the HTML code for the above.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 4
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 5

Question 6.
Name the tag which permits a user to add more than one web page in a single window. List any attributes of it with explanation.
Answer:
<FRAMESET> tag and <FRAME>tag
Attributes of <FRAMESET>

  • Rows: Used to divide screen in rowwise
  • Cols: Used to divide screen in column wise
  • Attributes of <FRAME>
  • SRC: Specifies name of web page to be loaded in Frame
  • NAME: Gives a name for the frame.

Eg. <FRAMESET Rows= “50%,*”>
<FRAME SRC= “page1.htm”>
<FRAME SRC= “page2.htm”>
</FRAMESET>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 7.
In VB, a Programmer can use Option Button, Text Box, Combo box, etc. to accept inputs from the user. Butin HTML<INPUT> tag is used for creating all the above controls. Which attributes of the <INPUT> tag is used for this? List and explain the possible values of it.
Answer:
The ‘type’ attribute of <INPUT> tag is used to create different control. The main values of type attribute is given below.
1. Text: Creates a single line Text Box.
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Text”>

2. Password: creates a password box in which characters are displayed by symbols like asterisk(*)
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Passwords”>

3. Check Box: Creates a check box.
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Check Box”>

4. Radio: Creates option button (Radio Button)
Eg.<INPUT Type= “Radio” Name-‘sex”Value= “M”>Male

5. Reset: Creates re^et button. It is used to clear all the data entered
Eg. <INPUT Type= “Reset”>

6. Submit: Creates a submit Button. When click on it data entered in the form will sent to web server. Eg. <INPUT Type = “Submit”>

Question 8.
Write the HTML code for the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 6
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 7

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 9.
Write the HTML Code for the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 8
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 9
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 10

Question 10.
Name the attributes in HTML, which can present in more than one tag.
Answer:
The attributes are

  1. Border: It can act in <Table> and in <Frameset> Tag.
  2. Bgcolor: It can act in <Table> and in <Body>tag.
  3. Type: It can act in <OL> and in <lnput>tag.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 11.
What are the main attributes of the <Form> tag?
Answer:
1. Method:
It determines the method of submission of form data to the server. Get and Post are the two form submission methods. Post method is used to pass large volume of data. Also post method is more secure as data entered is not visible during submission. The get method is faster and is used to send lesser volume of data and it is not secure.

2. Action:
The URL of the server side program to process the form data is specified by the Action attribute.
Eg: <Form Action=”http://www.scert.com/asp/ process.asp”>

Question 12.
What are the difference between get method and post method ?
Answer:

Post MethodGet Method
•   It is used to pass large volume of data

•   The data is nof visible during submission

•   It is slower.

•   It is secure.

•   It is used to pass lesser volume of data

•   The data is visible during submission

•   It is faster

•   It is not secure

Question 13.
Lena wants to create a web page, to select the dis¬trict name from a combo. By default the combo box contain the district Trichur. Help her to do so.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 11

Question 14.
Ram creates a web page to record the sex of a student. But he has made a mistake that the student can select both male and female choices at a time. What is the reason for the same. Help him to correct the mistake.
Answer:
To record sex of student radio buttons are used. Usually, radio buttons are provided as a group from which exactly one can be selected at a time by giving the same name for both radio buttons. But here Ram did not give same name for both buttons. Therefore the mistake. The correct code is as follows,
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 12

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 15.
Explain the attributes of <Frameset> Tag.
Answer:

  1. Cols: It determines the dimension of vertical frames(Columns) in the frameset page.
    Eg: <FramesetCols=”50%,*”> creates two vertical frames with equal width.
  2. Rows: It determines the dimension of horizontal frames(Rows) in the frameset page.
    Eg: <Frameset Rows=”50%,*”> creates two horizontal frames with equal height.
  3. Border: It specifies the thickness of the border for the frames.
  4. Bordercolor: It specifies the colour for the frame border.

Question 16.
Explain the attributes of <Frame tag>
Answer:

  1. Src: It specifie the URL of the document to be loaded in the frame.
  2. Scrolling: It indicates scroll bar is to be shown in the frame or not, values are yes, no or auto
  3. Noresize: It stops the resizing of the frame, no value is to be assigned.
  4. Margin width and Marginheight: It sets the horizontal and vertical margins, values are in pixels.
  5. Name: It gives a name for the frame.
  6. Target: It specifies the target frame.

Question 17.
Mr. Sonet visited a website that contains two frames. He tries to resize the first frame by mouse. But he failed to do so. What is the reason behind? Explain?
Answer:
This is because the web designer used Noresize attribute of frame tag while he design the page. Noresize attribute stops the resizing of the frame, no value is to be assigned.
Eg: <frame src=”page1 .html” noresize>

Question 18.
We know that an HTML document contains two sections head and body section. While designing a web page as follows what will happen?
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 13
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 14
Answer:
There is no output because a <frameset> tag has no body tag. It is very important. So the correct code is as follows,
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 15

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 19.
Create a web page as follows to display a list contains items.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 16
Answer:
To create a list box set the size property of <Select> tag to more than 1.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 17

Question 20.
In VB there are separate controls to create List Box and Combo Box. But in HTML these controls can be created by using a single tag.

  1. Name the tag used for this? (1)
  2. Which attribute is used for this and how? (2)

Answer:
1. < SELECT >

2. Size attribute
< SELECT Size = 1 > gives combo box
< SELECT Size = 3> gives a list box

Question 21.
Write HTML code for creating the following webpage using tag.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 18
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 19

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 22.
Write the HTML code for creating the following webpage using List tag.

COMPUTER TERMS
CPUCentral Processing Unit
ALUArithmetic and Logic Unit
WWWWorld Wide Web

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 20
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 21

Question 23.
What will be the output of the following?
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 22
Answer:
The output is as follows. E.COMPUTER, F.BIOLOGY.

Question 24.
Find the errors from the following and correct it.

  1. <ULtype=”A”start=5>
  2. <IMG src=”picture.jpg” size=100>
  3. <HTML>
    <HEAD><TITLE></HEAD></TITLE> <BODY>This is a sample web page</BODY>

Answer:

  1. UL has only specified types and has no start attribute
  2. IMG has no size attribute, use height or width attribute
  3. <HTML>
    <HEAD><TITLE></TITLE></HEAD> <BODY>This is a sample web page</BODY> </HTML>.

Question 25.
Your brother requested you to prepare a list of best friends, from your class using HTML.

  1. Which type of list you will prefer?
  2. Write HTML code to create such a list of 4 students.

Answer:
1. Ordered List<OL> Can be used.

2.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 23

Question 26.
Ravi wants to display the name of 6 subjects as a list by using Upper case Roman Numerals. Help him to do so.
Answer:
<OLType= “I”>
<LI>English
<LI> Sanskrit
<LI>Business studies
<LI>Accountancy
<LI>Economics
<LI>Computer Applications
</OL>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 27.
Your class selected you as the group leader of Group V. In your group there are 5 students with Roll No. 20 to 24. Prepare a list using appropriate tag in HTML.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 24

Question 28.
Write HTML code to get the following output.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 25
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 26

Question 29.
Write HTML code to get the following table as output.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 27
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 28
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 29

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 30.
Write the tags to define the following:

  1. Text Box
  2. Submit Button
  3. Reset Button
  4. Radio Button

Answer:

  1. .<inputtype=”text” name=”txtname”>
  2. .<input type=”Submit” value=”Send”>
  3. .<input type=”Reset” value=”Clear”>
  4. .<input type=”Radio” name=”Sex” value= “Male”>Male
    <input type=”Radio” name=”Sex” value=” Female”>Female

Plus Two Computer Application Web Designing Using HTML Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write an HTML code to create a web page with 3 frames as shown below:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 30
Answer:
Step 1: Take a notepad, type the following and save it as main.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 31

Step 2: Take another notepad, type the following and save it as page1.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 32
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 33

Step 3: Take another notepad, type the following and save it as page 2.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 34

step 4: Take another notepad, type the following and save it asframe.html on Desktop.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 35

Step 5. Finally run the frame.html file.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 2.
Explain any three attributes of <FORM>tag.
Answer:
1. Action: Here we give the name of program (including the path) stored in the Web server.

2. Method: There are 2 types of methods get and post.

Get methodPost method
1. Faster1. Slower
2. To send small volume of data2. To send large volume of data
3. Less secure3. More secure
4. Data visible during submission4. Data not visible during submission

3. Target: Specifies the target window for displaying the result. Values are given below.

  • _blank-Opens in a new window
  • _self-Opens in the same frame
  • _parent – Opens in the parent frameset
  • _top- Opens in the main browser window
  • name – Opens in the window with the specified name.

Question 3.
Explain the attributes of <Table> tag?

OR

Name any six attributes of <table> tag that determine the general layout of table.
Answer:

  1. Border: It specifies the thickness of the border lines around the table.
  2. Bordercolor: It specifies the colour for border lines
  3. Align: It specifies the table alignment, the values can be left, right or center
  4. Bgcolor: It specifies the back ground colour for the table.
  5. Cellspacing : It specifies the space between two table cells
  6. Cellpadding: It specifies the space between cell border and content
  7. Cols: It specifies the number of columns
  8. Width: It determines the table width
  9. Frame: It specifies the border lines around the table, values are void, border, box, above, below,…

Question 4.
Explain the attributes of <TH> and <TD>?
Answer:

  1. Align: It specifies the horizontal alignment of the content, the values can be left, right, center and justify.
  2. Valign: It specifies the vertical alignment of the content, the values can be top, middle, Bottom, and baseline.
  3. Bgcolor: It specifies the back ground colour for the cell.
  4. Colspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of columns.
    Eg: <TD Colspan=3> spans the cell over three columns
  5. Rowspan: It is used to span or to stretch a cell over a number of rows.
    Eg: <TD Rowspan=3> spans the cell over three rows.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 5.
Create an HTML page as shown below using lists.
The recipe for preparation

  1. The ingredients
    • 100g flour
    • 10g sugar
    • 1 cup water
    • 2 egg
    • Salt and pepper
  2. The procedure
    A. Mix dry ingredients thoroughly
    B. Pour in wet ingredients
    C. Mix for 10 mts
    D. Bake for 1 hr at 100 degree C temperature

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 36
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 37

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML

Question 6.
Create HTML code for the following output.

  1. Flowers
    • Jasmine
    • Rose
    • Lily
  2. Vegetables
    • Beetroot
    • Cabbage
    • Cucumber
  3. Fruits
    i. Apple
    ii. Orange
    iii. Pineapple

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 38
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Web Designing Using HTML - 39

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Students can Download Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Both apical and intercalary meristems are meristems
(a) primary
(b) secondary
(c) lateral
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) primary

Question 2.
Sclerieds present in
(a) fruit wall of nuts
(b) pulp of guava
(c) seed coat of legumes
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 3.
Which of the following condition of xylem is present in both monocot and dicot stems
(a) exarch
(b) endarch
(c) polyarch
(d) mesarch
Answer:
(b) endarch

Question 4.
Bark does not include
(a) secondary xylem
(b) secondary phloem
(c) periderm
(d) primary phloem
Answer:
(a) secondary xylem

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 5.
…………… is the living mechanical tissue
(a) collenchyma
(b) parenchyma
(c) sclerenchyma
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) collenchyma

Question 6.
What are the cells that make the leaves curl in plants during water stress?
Answer:
Bulliform cells/motor cells

Question 7.
What part of the plant would show the following:
(a) Radial vascular bundle
(b) Polyarch xylem
(c) Well developed pith
Answer:
(a) Radial vascular bundle

Question 8.
Apical meristem for elongation of Stem, Lateral meristem for ………..
Answer:
Increase in thickness.

Question 9.
While analysing the anatomy of a given slide, phloem, cambium & xylem are present. Identify the material.
Answer:
Dicot stem.

Question 10.
Tissues are specialised to perform mechanical function have thickening at corners, living and cellulosic. Name it.
Answer:
Collenchyma

Question 11.
A cross-section of plant materials show the following features under microscope there are many vascular bundles scattered in the parenchymatous tissue, xylem is endarch. What kind of plant part shows the above anatomy.
Answer:
Monocot stem

Question 12.
Name tissue which provides mechanical strength to the plant’s organs.
Answer:
Sclerenchyma and xylem

Question 13.
What does the fascicular cambium gives rise to?
Answer:
Secondary vascular tissues and medullary rays

Question 14.
From where do the secondary cambium appear?
Answer:
From permanent tissues

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 15.
Which type of meristems can be classified on the basis of positions in the plant body.
Answer:
Apical, intercalary and lateral

Question 16.
Find the odd one and give reason:
Phellem, Phellogen, Phloem, Phelloderm
Answer:
Phloem. The other components are part of periderm

Question 17.
Fill in the blanks:
Stem: Endarch:: Root: ……….
interfascicular cambium: secondary xylem:: cork cambium: …………
Answer:
Exarch, phelloderm

Question 18.
Activity of cambium is different in two seasons and xylem vessels formed have narrow and wider lumens. Give the type of wood formed during the different seasons.
Answer:
Springwood and autumn wood.

Question 19.
What use are phloem fibres put to
Answer:
Phloem fibers of plants like jute are used for making ropes.

Question 20.
Identify the plant group from the data given below.
(a) Habit-Tree
(b) Xylem vessels present
(c) Absence of companion cells in phloem
(d) No fruits
Answer:
Gymnosperm

Question 21.
Ramu observed the growth of a plant in his garden. He realised that the plant grow both in length and width. Name the tissue responsible for the growth of the plant.
Answer:
Meristems

Question 22.
A cross-section of plant materials show the following anatomical features under microscope.

  1. Vascular bundles are radially arranged
  2. Four xylem strands with exarch condition of the protoxylem. To which organ should it be assigned?

Answer:
Dicot root

Question 23.
The transverse section of a plant material shows the following anatomical features.

  1. vascular bundles are conjoint, scattered and surrounded by a sclerenchymatous bundle sheath.
  2. Phloem parenchyma is absent. What will you identify as?

Answer:
The plant is a monocotyledon.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 24.
The cross-section of a plant material showed the following features when viewed under the microscope.

  1. The vascular bundles were radially arranged.
  2. Four xylem strands with exarch condition of protoxylem.

To which organ should it be assigned?
Answer:
Dicot root

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
During the secondary thickening of a dicot stem, from the outer cotical region, a meristematic tissue is developed. Name this tissue and write the function of it.
Answer:
Phellogen/cork cambium – It produces phellum towards the outer sides & phelloderm towards the inner side. These 3 layers are known as periderm

Question 2.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter is an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img1
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img2

Question 3.
Differentiate the following characters of dicot stem and monocot stem.
Differentiated cortex, Protoxylem lacuna present, open bundle, bundle sheath, starch sheath, sclerenchymatous hypodermis, scattered bundles, V.Bs. arranged in a ring, closed bundles, phloem parenchyma absent, presence of pith, collenchymatous hypodermis.
Answer:

Dicot stemMonocot stem
Differentiated cortex

Open bundle

Starch sheath

V.Bs arranged in ring

Presence of pith

collenchymatous

hypoderms

Protoxylem lacuna present

Bundle sheath

Closed bundle

Phloem parenchyma absent

Sclerenchymatous hypoderms

Question 4.
Xylem is the complex tissue that transports water in plants.

  1. Name the main components of xylem.
  2. Which of these is most likely suitable for conducting water?

Answer:

  1. Xylem parenchyma, vessels, tracheid, xylem fibers.
  2. Vessels

Question 5.
Examine the anatomy of two plants

  1. Xylem vessels and tracheids are seen
  2. Xylem vessels absent and tracheids present

Answer:

  1. Angiosperm
  2. Gymnosperm

Question 6.
Identify the figure ‘A’ and ‘B’ and differentiate between ‘A’ and ‘B’.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img3
Answer:

AB
DicotstemDicot root
Vascular bundles are arranged in a ring, limited no., conjoint, endarch & openVascular bundles are radial, exarch

Question 7.
Secondary growth occurs in dicots and no such growth in monocots. Justify.
Answer:
In dicots, cambium is present in their vascular bundle. In monocot, cambium is absent in the vascular bundles. So secondary growth occurs in dicotyledons and not in monocotyledons.

Question 8.
Phloem is called the complex tissue while parenchyma is a simple tissue. Make the differences
Answer:
Phloem is made up of more than one type of cells namely, sieve tube, companion cell, phloem parenchyma & phloem fiber. Parenchyma consists of same types of cells.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 9.
When the cross-section of a stem was examined, a student could notice collenchymatous hypodermis, Limited number of open vascular bundles, cortex, endodermis, and pith.

  1. Identify the material.
  2. Draw the diagram of the material showing these parts and label.

Answer:
1. Dicot stem
2.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img4

Question 10.
Observe the diagrams and identify the tissue types.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img5
Answer:
a. Collenchyma
b. Sclerenchyma

Question 11.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter in an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img6
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img7

Question 12.
While doing anatomy practical, students observe ten following characters:

  • Undifferentiated ground tissue.
  • Numerous vascular bundles and are scattered.
  • Sclerenchymatous hypodermis
  • Presence of bundle sheath

1. Identify the material.
2. Write any one example of a plant having such characters.
Answer:

  1. Monocot stem.
  2. Grass/Bamboo

Question 13.
What is the function of phloem parenchyma?
Answer:
The phloem parenchyma stores food material and other substances like resins, latex, and mucilage.

Question14.
How do you correlate the activity of cambium with changing seasons?
Answer:
During winter season the cambium stops its activity. In spring season cambium becomes more active and produce large quantity of secondary tissue. The secondary xylem produced during spring season is called springwood. During autumn season and summer season the cambium becomes less active and produces small quantity of secondary tissue. The secondary xylem produced during this period is called autumn wood.

Question 15.
Mention the characteristic features of sieve-tube members.
Answer:
Sieve tubes are cylindrical have endplates called sieve plates. They are dead elements of phloem.

Question 16.
It is difficult to open and close wooden doors and windows during the rainy season. What is the reason?
Answer:
Imbibition It is the absorption of water by water-loving particles without forming a solution

Question 17.
Heartwood is resistant to microorganisms. Justify the statement.
Answer:
Contains alkalloids , tannins & resins

Question 18.
The microscopic observation is given below.

  1. Identify A and B.
  2. Write any two distinguishing characters of the above diagram.

Answer:

  1. A dicot stem B monocot stem
  2. In dicot stem vascular budles open, limited no.&arranged in the form of a ring. In monocot stem, vascular bundles closed, numerous & scattered

Question 19.
Simple tissues that perform mechanical support in plants are usually dead tissues’
Name the living simple tissue that provides mechanical support to plant organs. In which category of plants (dicots/monocots) do they found?
Answer:
Sclerenchyma tissues Monocots

Question 20.
What is present on the surface of the leaves which helps the plant prevent loss of water but is absent in roots?
Answer:
The cuticle is the waxy substance prevents the excessive water loss.

Question 21.
What is the epidermal cell modification in plants which prevents water loss?
Answer:
The presence of bulliform cells in the leaves of monocot plants, which helps in rolling and unrolling of lamina and prevents water loss.

Question 22.
Arrange the following in the sequence you would find them in a plant starting from the periphery – phellem. phellogen. phelloderm.
Answer:
phellem, phellogen, phelloderm.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 23.
A transverse section of the trunk of a tree shows concentric rings which are known as growth rings. How are these rings formed? What is the significance of these rings?
Answer:
It is formed due to the activity of vascular ambium. The growth ring comprises springwood and autumn wood that is formed in spring season and winter season respectively. These are used to determine the age of tree by counting the number of concentric rings.

Question 24.
While eating peach or pear it is usually seen that some stone-like structures get entangled in the teeth, what are these stone-like structures called?
Answer:
USB Non-elongated sclerenchyma(sclereids)

Question 25.
When your teacher asked to collect different types of seeds. One of the students collected some seeds from a tree. These seeds have no covering or naked.

  1. In which group of plants does this tree belong?
  2. Which portion of the plant develops into the seed?

Answer:

  1. Gymnosperms
  2. Ovule

Question 26.
We cannot find the woody trunk in monocot plants. Why?
Answer:
Monocots do not possess cambium Hence, the secondary tissues are not formed.

Question 27.
Identify the following materials under microscope.

  1. Xylem polyarch, Round vessels, homogenous cortex with xylem & phloem in radial manner.
  2. Endarch xylem, conjoint bundle, surrounded by bundle sheath, palisade and spongy tissues distinguished and kidney-shaped guard cells

Answer:

  1. Monocot root
  2. Dicot leaf

Question 28.
The product of photosynthesis is transported from the leaves to various parts of the plants and stored in some cells before being utilised. What are the cells/ tissues that store them?
Answer:
parenchyma tissue

Question 29.
Name the kind of vascular bundle in Fig. a and b.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img19
Answer:
a. Closed bundle
b. Open bundle

Question 30.
Heartwood is resistant to micro-organisms. Justify the statement.
Answer:
The deposition of substances like Tannin, resin, oil, gum, aromatic substances and essential oil in the central part of wood helps to resist the attack of microorganisms.

Question 31.
Cambial ring is responsible for the formation of secondary vascular tissues both in Dicot stem and Dicot root. Differentiate the origin of cambial ring in Dicot stem and Dicot root.
Answer:
1. In Dicot stem, the conjuctive tissues in between the vascular bundles become meristematic and form. interfascicular cambium, it joins with intrafascicular cambium to form a cambial ring.

2. In Dicot root, the tissue just below phloem and part of pericycle tissue above the protoxylem join together to form a wavy ring. Later it becomes circular.

Question 32.
Give reason

  1. Grittiness nature of sapota fruit pulp
  2. Increase thickness of stem intake and not in coconut

Answer:

  1. Due to the presence of nonelogated sclerenchyma tissues (sclereids)
  2. In Teak, cambium is present (dicot plant) In coconut, cambium is absent because it is a monocot plant.
    Cambial activity causes an increase in thickness

Question 33.
Match the following.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img8
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img9

Question 34.
You may have observed droplets of water at the tip of leaves of grasses during early morning. Your sister told it is a dewdrop.
As a science student do you agree with her? Explain. Compare this process with transpiration.
Answer:
No.

  1. The droplets of water are found in the tip of grass leaves. This is called Guttation. It occurs in early morning.
  2. Water drops come out from Hydathode seen in the vien endings of leaf.
  3. Transpiration is the loss of water in the form of water vapour from stomata of leaves.

Question 35.
How can we correlate the activity of cambium with changing season?
Answer:
In spring season the activity of cambium is more and produces large no. of xylem vessels with wide lumen. But in Autumn season the activity of cambium is less and produces fewer no.of xylem vessels with narrow lumen.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 36.
Classify the following characters under dicot and monocot stem?
Bundle sheath is present, open bundle, bundle cap is present, closed bundle, arranged in a broken ring, scattered bundle, collenchymatous hypodermis, sclerenchymatous hypodermis.
Answer:

Dicot stemMonocot stem
Open bundle

Bundle cap is present

Arranged in a broken ring

collenchymatous

Hypodermis

Bundle sheath is present

Closed bundle

Scattered bundle

Sclerenchymatous

Hypodermis

Question 37.
Distinguish between cork cambium and vascular cambium.
Answer:
1. Cork cambium is the meristematic layer that cut of the tissues outside called phellem and inside phelloderm.

2. Vascular cambium is the meristematic layer that cut of the tissues outside called secondary phloem and inside secondary xylem.

Question 38.
Identify the following diagram and write its function.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img10
Answer:
Hydathode. It is the pore found in the vein ending of the grass leaf through which water loss occurs in the form of droplets.

Question 39.
Which one out of the root or stem shows endarch arrangement of xylem? What is meant by endarch arrangement?
Answer:
Stem, In edarch xylem protoxylem, is present towards the centre (pith) and metaxylem is faced towards outside.

Question 40.
Observe the diagram and identify the tissue types. Justify your answer.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img11
Answer:

  • The first figure is the Sclerenchymatus tissue.
  • The second figure is the collenchymatous tissue.
  • In sclerenchyma tissue, the cell walls are lignified and dead.
  • In collenchymatous tissue, the cell walls are thick and living.

Question 41.
What are bulliform cells? Mention its significance
Answer:
These are the specialised cells found in the epidermis of monocot leaf. They are otherwise called as motor cells.
It helps in the rolling and unrollong of lamina

Question 42.
Where are the companion cells located in the flowering plants? What are their functions?
Answer:
Companion cells are located in the phloem cells of vascular tissue. They support the sieve tubes.

Question 43.
What category of permanent plant cell is a companion cell?
Answer:
Companion cells are specialised thin-walled parenchymatous cells found to be associated with sieve tubes.

Question 44.
Sieve tubes in angiosperms are associated with specialised parenchyma cells. Name those cells. How do they help sieve-tube members?
Answer:
Companion cells, help in physiological working of sieve-tube members.

Question 45.

  1. Name the various components of xylem.
  2. Which of them does not have a nucleus?

Answer:

  1. Tracheids, vessels, xylem parenchyma, and xylem fibers.
  2. Tracheids, vessels, and xylem fibers

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 46.
How are exarch and endarch conditions different anatomically in stem and root?
Answer:
1. The anatomical condition is endarch in dicot as well as monocot stem.

2. In endarch condition protoxylem lie towards inner side of vascular budle However, in anatomy of root.the condition is exarch.i.e protoxylem is towards outer side and metaxylem is towards centre.

Question 47.
Cork cambium forms tissues that form the cork. Do you agree with this statement? Give reasons.
Answer:
Cork cambium develops in cortex region during secondary growth in stem. Cork cambium cut off cork (phellum) towards the outside and secondary cortex or phellodem towards the inner-side.

Question 48.
If one debarks a tree, what parts of the plant is being removed?
Answer:
Phloem is removed and food translocation becomes difficult.

Question 49.
What is periderm? How does periderm formation take place in the dicot stems?
Answer:
Phellogen, phellem, and phelloderm are together known as periderm. Due to secondary growth of the stem, the outer cortical and epidermis layer broken and replaced by another meristematic issue called phellogen. Phellogen or cork cambium cuts off cells on both sides the outer cells are called cork or phellem and the inner cells are phelloderm or secondary cortex.

Question 50.
Some anatomical details of material are given below vascular bumdles are conjoint and open, medullary rays are present, hypodermis collenchymatous, cortex heterogenous

  1. Identify the material
  2. Name the tissue given above from which interfascicular cambium develops during secondary growth.

Answer:

  1. Dicot stem
  2. Medullary ray

Question 51.
Three type of tissues formed during secondary growth together have protective functions.

  1. Name the three types
  2. Name the opening found in outer part of mature woody dicot stem and give its function

Answer:

  1. phellem, phellogen, and phelloderm
  2. lenticel, gaseous exchange

Question 52.

  1. Distinguish between heartwood and sapwood.
  2. Heartwood is durable why?

Answer:
1. Distinguish between heartwood and sapwood
Heartwood

  • found in the central part
  • nonfunctional
  • dark coloured

Sapwood

  • found in peripheral part
  • functional
  • light coloured

2. Heartwood is resistant to microbial attack and it is filled with resin, gum, essential oil, aromatic oil, and tannins. Hence heartwood is durable.

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A portion of the transverse section of maize stem is shown in the diagram.
Label a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h and i.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img12
Answer:

  1. a – Cuticle
  2. b – Epidermis
  3. c – Sclerenchymatous hypodermis
  4. d – Sclerenchymatous sheath
  5. e – Parentchymatous sheath
  6. f – Phloem
  7. g – Metaxylem
  8. h – Protoxylem
  9. i – Water cavity.

Question 2.
Differentiate the following

  1. Bark & Periderm
  2. Heartwood &Sapwood
  3. Endarch & Exarch

Answer:
1. Bark – It is the tissue outside vascular cambium.
Periderm – It is the outer protective tissue It includes phellem, phellogen, and phelloderm.

2. Heartwood – It is the dark coloured, nonfunctional central part of wood resistant to the attack of microorganisms.
Sap wood – It is the light coloured, functional and peripheral part of wood.

3. Endarch – It is the arrangement of xylem in which protoxylem facing towards cente and metaxylem towards the periphery, eg. stem.
Exarch – It is the arrangement of xylem in which Metaxylem facing towards centre and protoxylem towards periphery.eg: Root.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
Match column A with B and C.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img13
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img14

Question 4.
Match the Following.

AB
NostocProtonema
Gonyaulaxrespiratory root
Chlorellared tide
CycasSpace travelers
Rhizophoraheterocyst
FunariaCoralloid root

Answer:

AB
Nostocheterocyst
Gonyaulaxred tide
ChlorellaSpace travelers
CycasCoral loid root
RhizophoraRespiratory root
FunariaProtonema

Question 5.
The following are the characters of Dicot stem and Monocot stem. Identify the character and write in appropriate column.

  1. collenchymatous hypodermis
  2. Sclerenchymatous hypodermis
  3. Open bundle
  4. Closed bundle
  5. Bundle cap present
  6. Bundle sheath present
  7. Xylem polygonal
  8. Xylem circular
Dicot stemMonocot stem

Answer:

DICOTSTEMMONOCOT STEM
ab
cd
ef
gh

Question 6.
Plant growth is indeterminate in most plants it can go on indefinitely at the tips of roots and shoots. Special types of tissues are located at these regions

  1. Name those tissues
  2. Classify these tissues based on the position and origin.

Answer:

  1. Meristematic tissues
  2. Based on the position they are classified into three types,
    • apical meristem
    • intercalary meristem and
    • lateral meristem

Based on the origin, they are classified into 2.

  1. primary meristem and
  2. Secondary Meristem

Question 7.
1. Choose from among the following key terms and
complete the chart given below.
conjoint, closed, exarch open, …………. large, ……………. small endarch, radial ……….. few in a ring, ……….. many xylem and phloem bundles
few.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img15
2. Comment on the utility of this chart.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img16

Question 8.
The following schematic representation shows the classification of complex tissues. Complete it.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img17
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants img18

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants NCERT Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the three basic tissue systems in the flowering plants. Give the tissue names under each system.
Answer:
On the basis of their structure and location, there are three types of tissue systems:

  1. Epidermal Tissue System. Epidermis, Stomata.
  2. Ground or Fundamental Tissue System Parenchyma, Sclerenchyma and Collenchyma.
  3. Vascular or conducting Tissue System. Phloem and Xylem.

Question 2.
The transverse section of a plant material shows the following anatomical features

  1. the vascular bundles are conjoint, scattered and surrounded by a sclerenchymatous bundle sheath.
  2. phloem parenchyma is absent. What will you identify as?

Answer:
As is clear from above TS of monocot stem vascular bundles are scattered in monocot stems and phloem parenchyma is absent.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
Why are xylem and phloem called complex tissues?
Answer:
Xylem and phloem are composed of several types of cells and they work as a unit. Hence they are called complex tissues.

Question 4.
What is the stomatal apparatus? Explain the structure of stomata with a labelled diagram.
Answer:
Stomata are structures present in the epidermis of leaves. Stomata regulate the process of transpiration and gaseous exchange. Each stomata is composed of two bean-shaped cells known as guard cells. In grasses, the guard cells are dumbbell-shaped.

The outer walls of guard cells (away from the stomatal pore) are thin and the inner walls (towards the stomatal pore) are highly thickened. The guard cells possess chloroplasts and regulate the opening and closing of stomata.

Plus One Botany Anatomy of Flowering Plants Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Interfascicular cambium is a
(a) primary meristematic tissue
(b) primordial meristem
(c) type of proto deny
(d) secondary meristematic tissue
Answer:
(d) secondary meristematic tissue

Question 2.
In an annual ring, the light coloured part is known as
(a) earlywood
(b) late wood
(c) heartwood
(d) sapwood
Answer:
(a) earlywood

Question 3.
The layer of cells outside the phloem meant for giving rise to the root branches is called
(a) cambium
(b) cork
(c) endodermis
(d) pericycle
Answer:
(d) pericycle

Question 4.
Cork cambium of dicot originates from
(a) epiblema
(b) pericycle
(c) the cambium of vascular bundles
(d) endodermis
Answer:
(b) pericycle

Question 5.
Alburnum is otherwise known as
(a) periderm
(b) sapwood
(c) heartwood
(d) cork
Answer:
(b) sapwood

Question 6.
Duramen is present in
(a) inner region of secondary wood
(b) part of sapwood
(c) outer region of secondary wood
(d) region of pericycle
Answer:
(a) inner region of secondary wood

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 7.
Which one of the following is the correct sequence of tissues present in dicot stem during secondary growth
(a) Phellogen, cork, primary cortex, secondary cortex
(b) Cork, primary cortex, secondary cortex, phellogen
(c) Primary cortex, secondary cortex, phellogen, cork
(d) Secondary Cortex, phellogen, cork .primary cortex
Answer:
(d) Secondary Cortex, phellogen, cork .primary cortex

Question 8.
The meristem responsible for extra stelar secondary growth in dicot stem is
(a) interfascicular cambium
(b) intrafascicular cambium
(c) intercalary meristem
(d) phellogen
Answer:
(d) phellogen

Question 9.
Tracheids
(a) are the dominant cell types of xylem in angiosperms
(b) are primarily found in mosses and liverworts
(c) are responsible for water conduction and support in many land plants.
(d) first appeared during Palaeozoic era
Answer:
(c) are responsible for water conduction and support in many land plants.

Question 10.
In the following, how the sapwood is converted into heartwood?
(a) By degeneration of protoplast of living cells
(b) Tyloses formation
(c) By deposition of resins, oils, gums, etc
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(d) All of the above

Question 11.
As secondary growth proceeds in a dicot stem, the thickness of
(a) sapwood increases
(b) heartwood increases
(c) both sapwood and heartwood increase
(d) both sapwood and heartwood remains the same
Answer:
(c) both sapwood and heartwood increase

Question 12.
Which is not a characteristic of plant cell walls?
(a) Found only in the sporophyte phase of life cycle
(b) Among other compounds contains compounds built of simple sugars
(c) May contain enzymes that are biologically active
(d) Often contain strengthening polymers
Answer:
(a) Found only in the sporophyte phase of life cycle

Question 13.
Identify the correct order of the components with reference to their arrangement from outer side to inner side in a woody dicot stern.

  1. Secondary cortex
  2. Autumn wood
  3. Secondary phloem
  4. Phellem

(a) 2,3, 1,4
(b) 3,4,2,1
(c) 4, 1,3,2
(d) 1,2,4,3
Answer:
(c) 4, 1,3,2

Question 14.
Removal of ring wood of tissue outside the vascular cambium from the tree trunk kills it because
(a) water cannot move up
(b) food does not travel down and root become starved
(c) shoot become starved
(d) annual rings are not produced
Answer:
(b) food does not travel down and root become starved

Question 15.
Which tissue gives rise to secondary growth?
(a) Apical meristem
(b) Adventitious roots
(c) Germinating seed
(d) Vascular cambium
Answer:
(d) Vascular cambium

Question 16.
Growth rings are formed due to activity of
(a) extrastelar cambium
(b) intrastelar cambium
(c) interstelar cambium
(d) Both (b) and (c)
Answer:
(d) Both (b) and (c)

Question 17.
A nail is driven into the trunk of a 30 years old tree at a point l in above the soil level. The tree grows in height at the rate of 0.5m a year. After three years, the nail will be
(a) 1m above the soil
(b) 1.5 m above the soil
(c) 2 in above the soil
(d) 2.5 m above the soil
Answer:
(a) 1m above the soil

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Anatomy of Flowering Plants

Question 18.
In which of the following, there is no differentiation of bark, sapwood, and heartwood?
(a) Ashok
(b) Neem
(c) Mango
(d) Datepalm
Answer:
(d) Datepalm

Question 19.
A tree grows at a rate of 0.5 m per year. What will be the height of the board fixed at 1.5 m above the base five years ago?
(a) 4.0 m
(b) 3.5 m
(c) 1.5 m
(d) 4.5 m
Answer:
(c) 1.5 m

Question 20.
Secondary phloem remains functional generally
(a) for one year
(b) for less than one year
(c) for many years
(d) as long as the plant is alive
Answer:
(d) as long as the plant is alive

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Students can Download Chapter 4 Biomolecules Questions and Answers, Plus One zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Plus One Biomolecules One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Many elements are found in living organisms either free or in the form of compounds. One of the following is not, found in living organisms.
(a) Silicon
(b) Magnesium
(c) Iron
(d) Sodium
Answer:
(a) Silicon

Question 2.
Aminoacids, as the name suggests, have both an amino group and a carboxyl group in their structure. In addition, all naturally occurring amino acids (those which are found in proteins) are called L-aminoacids. From this, can you guess from which compound can the simplest amino acid be made?
(a) Formic acid
(b) Methane
(c) Phenol
(d) Glycine
Answer:
(b) Methane

Question 3.
When we homogenise any tissue in an acid the acid soluble pool represents
(a) Cytoplasm
(b) Cell membrane
(c) Nucleus
(d) Mitochondria
Answer:
(a) Cytoplasm

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Many organic substances are negatively charged e.g., acetic acid, while others are positively charged e.g., ammonium ion. An amino acid under certain conditions would have both positive and negative charges simultaneously in the same molecule. Such a form of amino acid is called
(a) Positively charged form
(b) Negatively charged form
(c) Neutral form
(d) Zwitter ionic form
Answer:
(d) Zwitter ionic form

Question 5.
Sugars are technically balled carbohydrates, referring to the fact that their formulae are only multiple of C(H2O). Hexoses, therefore, have six carbons, twelve hydrogens and six oxygen atoms. Glucose is a hexose.
Choose from among the following another hexose.
(a) Fructose
(b) Erythrose
(c) Ribulose
(d) Ribose
Answer:
(a) Fructose

Question 6.
Fill the gap:
Inhibition of succinic dehydrogenase by Malonate is an example for _____________
Answer:
Competitive Inhibition

Question 7.
Name the phospholipid found in cell membrane.
Answer:
Lecithin

Question 8.
The metabolic pathway from glucose to lactic acid which occurs in 10 metabolic steps is called ________________
Answer:
Glycolysis

Question 9.
Energy currency in living systems is _______________
Answer:
Adenosine triphosphate (ATP)

Question 10.
Find the off one out.
Rubber, Amino Acids, Drugs, Pigments
Answer:
Amino acids: Amino acids are primary metabolites. All others are secondary metabolites.

Question 11.
Arrange the following Carbo-hydrates in the order of increasing complexity of chemical structure.
Glucose, Oligosaccharides, Lactose, Starch.
Answer:
Glucose → Lactose → Oligosaccharides → Starch

Question 12.
One full turn of the DNA double helix would involve.
(a) 8 steps
(b) 10 steps
(c) 20 steps
(d) 12 steps
Answer:
(b) 10 steps

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 13.
Match the column A with B and C.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 1
Answer:

  • Glucose – Glycoside – Carbohydrate
  • Aminoacids – Peptide – Protein
  • Nucleotide – Phosphor diester – Nucleic acid

Question 14.
A short length of DNA double helix contains 60 Adenine nucleotides and 40 cytosine nucleotides. What will be the total number of nucleotides in it? (60, 120, 80, 200)
Answer:
200

Question 15.
Add suitable word in the gap.

  1. A protein molecule is a polymers of _____________
  2. Nucleic acids are polymers of _____________
  3. DNA has _________ instead of uracil.
  4. Single stranded structure is found in ___________

Answer:

  1. Aminoacids
  2. Nucleotides
  3. Thymine
  4. RNA

Question 16.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 2
The structure of amino acids in solutions of different PH are given above. Identify the structure ‘B’.
Answer:
Zwitterionic form

Question 17.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 3
Name the enzyme catalyse this reaction.
Answer:
Carbonic anhydrase

Plus One Biomolecules Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Observe the table and fill the blanks from the brackets.
(Collagen, Cholesterol, chitin, Lecithin)
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 4
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 5

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Building blocks of proteins are amino acids and that of polysaccharides are monosaccharides. Many polysaccharides are called homopolymers but all proteins are known as heteropolymers.

  1. Do you agree with the above statement? Give reason.
  2. Give one example for a homopolymer.

Answer:

  1. Yes. Many polysaccharides are made up of only one type of monosaccharide. They are known as homopolymers. But all protein contain different type of amino acids. So they all are heteropolymers.
  2. Cellulose. Cellulose is made up of only one type of monosaccharide ie. glucose.

Question 3.
Classify the following as polypeptide and polysaccharide.
(Insulin, Glycogen, Chitin, Paper)
Answer:

PolypeptidePolysaccharide
InsulinGlycogen
Chitin
Paper

Question 4.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 6

  1. Observe the graph and comment.
  2. List out the factors which influence enzyme activity.

Answer:

  1. Each enzyme shows its highest activity at a particular temperature called the optimum temperature. Activity declines both below and above the optimum value.
  2. Temperature, pH, change in substrate concentration, binding of specific chemicals that regulate enzyme activity.

Question 5.
Write the general names of the following.

  1. Enzymes catalyzing the linking together of two compounds.
  2. Enzymes that catalyze removed of groups from substrates by mechanism other than hydrolysis leaving double bonds.

Answer:

  1. Ligases
  2. Lyases

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Find out the differences between DNA and RNA and fill the table given below.

DNARNA
?Ribonucleotides
Deoxyribosugar?
?Single stranded
ACTS Present?

Answer:

DNARNA
DeoxyribonucleotidesRibonucleotides
DeoxyribosugarRibose sugar
Double strandedSingle stranded
ACTG PresentACUG Present

Question 7.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 7
Two polymers are given. In this chain how are monomers linked ?
Answer:
a. Glycosidicbond
b. Peptide bond

Question 8.
The following graph shows the relationship between subtrate concentration and rate of enzymatic reaction.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 8

  1. What is the effect of subtrate concentration on rate of reaction ?
  2. Identify ‘A’.

Answer:
1. With the increase in substrate concentration, the velocity of the enzymatic reaction rise at first. The reaction ultimately reaches a maximum velocity V(max) which is not exceeded by any further rise in concentration of the substrate.

This is because the enzyme molecules are fewer than the substrate molecule and after saturation of these molecules, there are no free enzyme molecules to bind with the additional substrate molecule.

2. V(max)

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 9.
Identify the class of enzyme which catalyse the following reaction.

  1. S reduced + S’ oxidised ? S oxidised + S’ reduced
  2. S – G + S’→ S + S’ – G
    X Y
    I I
  3. C – C → X-Y+C
  4. C-O, C-S, C-N bonds

Answer:

  1. Oxidoreductase
  2. Transferase
  3. Lyases
  4. Ligases

Question 10.
A portion of DNA double helix is given below. Copy the diagram and make correction if any.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 9
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 10

Question 11.
Adenine, Guanine, thymine, Cytosine, Uracil, are the nitrogen bases present in the living organisms. Write their nucleosides and nucleotides.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 11

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 12.

  1. Prepare a graph showing the action of temperature on enzyme activity.
  2. What is optimum temperature.

Answer:
1.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 12

2. Each enzyme shows its highest activity at a particular temperature called optimum temperature.

Question 13.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 13

  1. Identify the given graph
  2. If we add more substrate after reaching Vmax, What will be the effect in the reaction rate?

Answer:

  1. Effect of change in concentration of substrate on enzyme activity.
  2. There is no further increase in the velocity of reaction because there are no free enzyme molecules to bind with the additional substrate molecule.

Question 14.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 14
The table shows the percentage composition of different elements of a living matter and a non-living matter represented as X and Y. Identify X and Y.
Answer:

  1. X – Non living matter (Earth’s crust)
  2. Y – Living matter (human body)

Question 15.
Fatty acids could be saturated or unsaturated. Give an account on it.
Answer:
1. Fatty acids are saturated if they do not have any double bond between the carbons of the molecular chain.
eg: Palmitic acid.

2. Unsaturated fatty acids have one or more double bond between carbon of the molecular chain,
eg: linoleic acid.

Question 16.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 15
Identify the structure.
Answer:
Cholesterol

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 17.
General Formula of amino acid is given below.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 16
(a) Prepare the amino acids – Glycine and Serine using this formula.
(b) State the influence of pH in the nature of amino acid.
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 17

(b) Amino acids are of basic amino acids, acidic amino acids, Neutral amino acids and aromatic amino acids. Hence in solutions of different pH, the structure of amino acids changes.

Question 18.
Chemical structure of an Amino acid is given.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 18
(a) Prepare its Zwitter ionic form.
(b) What happens to the Zwitter ion if it is placed in acidic medium?
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 19

(b) In acidic medium it gains H and become positive charged
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 20

Question 19.
Write the missing word.

  1. Amino acid: Protein, Nucleotide: __________
  2. Glucose: Monosaccharide, Starch: __________
  3. Adenine: Thymine, Guanine: ________
  4. Animals: Glycogen, Plants: _________

Answer:

  1. Nucleic acid
  2. Polysaccharide
  3. Cytosine
  4. Starch

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 20.
(a) Identify the structure of protein A and B.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 21
(b) Write an example for a protein with a quaternary structure.
Answer:
(a) A) Secondary structure
B) Tertiary structure

(b) Hemoglobin

Question 21.
Proteins carry out many functions in living organisms. List them.
Answer:

  1. Some protein functions as enzymes.
  2. Some protein functions as Hormones.
  3. Some protein fight infectious organisms.
  4. Some protein transport nutrients across the cell membrane.

Question 22.
Give an example forthe following.

  1. Phospholipids
  2. Saturated fatty acid
  3. Nucleoside
  4. Nucleotide

Answer:

  1. Lecithin
  2. Palmitic acid
  3. Adenosine
  4. Adenylic acid

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 23.
B-DNA is the most common DNA. Write the salient features of this DNA.
Answer:
The length of one full turn of a B-DNA molecule is 34A0. The distance between two adjacent nucleotides in a chain is 3.4A0. Thus there are 10 pairs of nucleotides in one full turn of DNA molecule.

Question 24.
Identify the structure.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 22
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 23
Answer:
(a) Adenine
(b) Adenosine

Question 25.
The given structure showing the molecule give ready energy for biological activities. Identify the structure.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 24
Answer:
Adenosine triphosphate (ATP)

Question 26.
Schematic diagram of DNA is given. Copy the structure and correct it, if there is any mistake.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 25
Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 26

Question 27.
Classify the given terms into two columns and give appropriate heading.
rubber, Glucose, amino acids, drugs, gums, spices, cholesterol, Fatty acids.
Answer:

Primary MetabolismSecondary Metabolism
GlucoseRubber
Amino acidsDrugs
CholesterolGums
Fatty acidsSpices

Question 28.
Progress of a chemical reaction and potential energy changes associated with it is plotted as curve.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 27

  1. What happens to the activation energy of the substrate, when enzyme is added to the reaction system?
  2. Redraw the above graph and also plot another curve showing the progress of the reaction and associated potential energy change, when enzyme is added to the system.

Answer:
1. Activation energy decreases

2.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 28

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 29.
Observe the given graph a and
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 29

  1. State how temperature and pH influences enzyme activity.
  2. Does the substrate concentration influence enzyme activity. If so, how?

Answer:
1. Each enzyme shows its highest activity at a particular temperature. This is called optimum temperature. Low temperature or high temperature reduces the enzyme activity. Same as, there is an optimum pH for enzyme activity. Deviation from this pH reduces the enzyme activity.

2. With the increase in substrate concentration, the velocity of the enzymatic reaction increase at first, as the substrate concentration continues to increase, the increase in the rate of reaction begins to slow down and finally no further rise in velocity occurs. This is because there is no free enzyme molecule to bind additional substrate molecule.

Question 30.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 30
The graph shows the relation between potential energy and progress of reaction. Observe the graph and answer the questions.

  1. Is this reaction”exothermic or endothermic? Give reason.
  2. What happen to the amount of enzyme at completion of reaction?

Answer:

  1. Exothermic. The energy level of substrate is higher than that of product.
  2. No change to enzyme

Question 31.
Observe the diagram.

  1. Name the process showing here.
  2. How is this process would be useful?

Answer:

  1. Competitive inhibition
  2. Competitive inhibitor are often used in the control of bacterial pathogen.

Question 32.
Fill in the blank columns with the correct terms/ sentences.

AB
………. (1)…………..Catalyse oxido – reduction between two substrates.
Transferase……. (1)………..
………. (2)………..Catalyse hydrolysis of ester, glycosidic bond
Lyases………. (2)……………
………. (3)…………..Catalyse inter conversion of optical isomers
Ligase………. (3)…………………..

Answer:

AB
OxidoreductaseCatalyse oxido – reduction between two substrates.
TransferaseCatalyse group transfer between substrates.
HydrolaseCatalyse hydrolysis of ester, glycosidic bond
LyasesRemoval of group from a substrate by clearing double bonds.
IsomeraseCatalyse inter conversion of optical isomers
LigaseCatalyse linking together of two compounds.

Plus One Biomolecules Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Structure of a nucleotide pair in DNA is showing below.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 31
Identify the bonds A, B and C.
Answer:

  • A – Hydrogen bond
  • B – Glycosidic bond
  • C – Ester bond

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 2.
Give examples.

  1. Prosthetic group
  2. Co-enzyme
  3. Metal ion required for enzyme activity.

Answer:

  1. Haem is the prosthetic group of enzyme peroxidase.
  2. NADP and NAD contain the Vitamin Niacin.
  3. Zinc present in carboxy peptidase.

Question 3.
Give one word.

  1. The nucleic acids that behave like enzymes
  2. The organic compound tightly bound to the apo enzyme.
  3. The non protein organic compound that are not tightly bound to the apoenzyme.
  4. The protein portion of the enzyme.

Answer:

  1. Ribosome
  2. Prosthetic group
  3. Co-enzyme
  4. Apoenzyme

Question 4.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 32
Identify the molecules A and B and name the bond marked C.
Answer:

  • A – Glucose
  • B – Maltose
  • C- Glycosidicbond

Question 5.
Observe the structure.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 33

  1. Identify the bond formed between amino acids.
  2. How many types of amino acids are present in animal body?
  3. In nutrition some amino acids are required. Write a note on it.

Answer:

  1. Peptide bond
  2. 20 types of amino acids
  3. Note on amino acids:
    • Essential amino acids: The amino acids can not be synthesisecHn the animal body and must be obtained through diet are called essential amino acids.
    • Non-essential amino acids: The amino acids which can be synthesised in the body are called non essential amino acids.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 6.
Give name.

  1. The most abundant protein in animal.
  2. The most abundant protein in the whole of the biosphere.
  3. A polymer of fructose.
  4. Paper made from plant pulp is
  5. Complex polysaccharide present in the exoskeleton of Arthropods
  6. Polysaccharide with helical structure

Answer:

  1. Collagen
  2. RuBisCo
  3. Insulin
  4. Cellulose
  5. Chitin
  6. Starch

Question 7.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 34

  1. Identify the structures A, B, C and D.
  2. Name the molecule formed by the esterification of one ‘D’ molecule and three ‘C’ molecule.

Answer:

  1. Structures:
    • A) Glucose
    • B) Amino acid (Glycine)
    • C) Fatty acid
    • D) Glycerol
  2. 1 glycerol + 3 fatty acid Triglyceride

Question 8.
Match the column A and B.

AB
a. BioluminescenceFructose
b. InulinBasic amino acid
c. LysineNicotinamide adenine
dinucleotide
d. SkeltonCtenophora
e. NucleosideSpicules
f. Co-enzymeThymidine

Answer:

AB
a. BioluminescenceCtenophora
b. InulinFructose
c. LysineBasic amino acid
d. SkeltonSpicules
e. NucleosideThymidine
f. Co-enzymeNicotinamide adenine
dinucleotide

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 9.
The activity of the enzyme is inhibited by certain chemicals having close resemblance to the substrate in its molecular structure.

  1. Name the type of inhibition
  2. Point out a suitable example
  3. Mention the Significance of this type of inhibition.

Answer:

  1. Competitive inhibition
  2. Inhibition of succinic dehydrogenase by malonate. Which closely resembles the substrate succinate in structure.
  3. Competitive inhibition are often used in the control of bacterial pathogen.

Question 10.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 35
The figure shows the bonding of a biomolecule

  1. Identify the monomer
  2. Name the bond between the molecules
  3. Name the macromolecule formed

Answer:

  1. Glucose
  2. Glycosidic bond
  3. Starch

Plus One Biomolecules NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Proteins have primary structure. If you are given a method to know which amino acid is at either of the two termini (ends) of a protein, can you connect this information to purity or homogeneity of a protein?
Answer:
In there is one type of amino acid at both termini then it is homopolymer and it cannot be a pure protein. When there are different types of amino acids on both termini then it is a pure protein as proteins are heteropolymer. This property of protein in because of presence of 21 types of amino acids.

Question 2.
Find out and make a list of proteins used as therapeutic agents. Find other applications of proteins (e.g., Cosmetics art)
Answer:

  1. Therapeutic Agents:
    • Contraceptive pills: As they are hormones so they are made up of protein.
    • Nutritional Supplements: Many brands are available as protein supplements. Example: Protinex.
  2. Other Uses: Chicken cubes are used in making soups and dishes.

Question 3.
Explain the composition of triglyceride.
Answer:
Triglycerides are formed from a single molecule of glycerol, combined with three fatty acids on each of the OH groups, and make up most of fats digested by humans. Easter bonds from between each fatty acid and the glycerol molecule.
General structure of a triglyceride Chemical formula:

RCOO-CH2CH(-OOCR)CH2-OOCR,
where R, R’, and R” are longer alkyl chains. The three fatty acids RCOOH, RCOOH and RCOOH can be all different, all the same, or only two the same. Chain lengths of the fatty acids in naturally occurring triglycerides can be of varying lengths, but 16, 18 and 20 carbons are the most common.

Natural fatty acids found in plants and animals are typically composed only of even numbers of carbon atoms due to the way they are biosynthesized from acetyl CoA. Bacteria, however, possess the ability to synthesise odd – and branched – chain fatty acids. Consequently, ruminant animal fat contains odd num¬bered fatty acids, such as 15, due to the action of bacteria in the rumen.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Can you describe What happens when milk is converted into curd or yogurt, from your understanding of proteins?
Answer:
Casein is the predominant phosphoprotein, that accounts for nearly 80% of proteins in cow milk and cheese. Milk-clotting proteases act on the soluble portion of the caseins. K Casein, thus originating an unstable micellar state that results in clot formation. When coagulated with chymosin, casein is sometimes called paracasein.

Casein is not coagulated by heat. It is precipitated by acids and by rennet enzymes, a proteolytic enzyme typically obtained from the stomachs of calves.

Question 5.
Can you attempt building models of biomolecules using commercially available atomic models (Ball and Stick models)?
Answer:
Following three-dimensional structure of cellulose can be made using balls and sticks. Similarly, models of other biomolecules can be made.
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 36

Question 6.
Attempt titrating an amino acid against a weak base and discover the number of dissociating (ionizable) functional groups in the amino acid.
Answer:
On titrating against a weak base the amino acid ionizes into following functional groups.

  • NH2 (amino group)
  • COOH (Carboxyl group)

Question 7.
Draw the structure of the amino acid, alanine.

Answer:
Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules - 37

Question 8.
What are gums made of? Is Fevicol different?
Answer:
Natural gums are polysaccharides of natural origin, capable of causing a large viscosity increase in solution, even at small concentrations. Fevicol is a synthetic glue. These adhesives are a mixture of ingredients (typically polymers) dissolved in a solvent. As the solvent evaporates, the adhesive hardens.

Depending on the chemical composition of the adhesive, they will adhere to different materials to greater or lesser degrees. These adhesives are typically weak and are used for household applications.

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 9.
Explain the basic structure of a nucleotide.
Answer:
A nucleotide is a building block of nucleic acids. A nucleotide has following components:

  1. A heterocyclic compound (base)
  2. A mnonosaccharide, and
  3. A phosphoric acid or a phosphate.

Plus One Biomolecules Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Enzyme often have additional parts intheirstructures that are made up of molecules otherthan proteins. When this additional chemical part is an organic molecule, it is called
(a) cofactor
(b) coenzyme
(c) substrate
(d) Both (a) and (b)
Answer:
(a) cofactor

Question 2.
Nucleotides are formed by
(a) sugar and phosphate
(b) purine, pyrimidine and phosphate
(c) purine, pyrimidine, sugar and phosphate
(d) pyrimidine, sugar and phosphate
Answer:
(b) purine, pyrimidine and phosphate

Question 3.
The effectiveness of an enzyme is affected least by
(a) temperature
(b) concentration of the substrate
(c) original activation energy of the system
(d) concentration of the enzyme
Answer:
(c) original activation energy of the system

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 4.
Which is an organic compound found in most cells?
(a) Glucose
(b) Water
(c) Sodium chloride
(d) Oxygen
Answer:
(a) Glucose

Question 5.
Enzymes that catalyse inter-conversion of optical, geometrical or positional isomers are
(a) ligases
(b) lyases
(c) hydrolases
(d) isomerases
Answer:
(d) isomerases

Question 6.
Which one of the following is wrongly matched?
(a) Fungi – Chitn
(b) Phospholipid – Plasma membrane
(c) Enzyme – Lipopolysacchande
(d) ATP – Nucleotide derivative
Answer:
(c) Enzyme – Lipopolysacchande

Question 7.
An organic substance bound to an enzyme and essential for its activity is called
(a) coenzyme
(b) holoenzyme
(c) apoenzyme
(d) isoenzyme
Answer:
(a) coenzyme

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 8.
The ‘Repeating unit of glycogen is
(a) fructose
(b) mannose
(c) glucose
(d) galactose
Answer:
(c) glucose

Question 9.
Feedback inhibition of enzymes is affected by which of the following?
(a) Enzyme
(b) Substrate
(c) End products
(d) Intermediate end products
Answer:
(c) End products

Question 10.
The enzyme, which combines with non-protein part to form a functional enzyme, is known as
(a) coenzyme
(b) holoenzyme
(c) apoenzyme
(d) prosthetic group
Answer:
(b) holoenzyme

Question 11.
Benedict’s reagent test is conducted to confirm the presence of
(a) polysaccharides like starch
(b) lipids
(c) reducing sugars
(d) proteins
Answer:
(c) reducing sugars

Question 12.
Which disaccharide has different linkage?
(a) Maltose
(b) Starch
(c) Sucrose
(d) Lactose
Answer:
(c) Sucrose

Question 13.
Select the wrong statement.
(a) The building blocks of lipids are amino acids
(b) Majority of enzymes contain a non-protein part called the prosthetic group
(c) The thylakoids are arranged one above the other like a stack of coins forming a granum
(d) Crossing over occurs at pachytene stage ofmeiosis-l
Answer:
(a) The building blocks of lipids are amino acids

Question 14.
Which of the following is a disaccharide?
(a) Glucose
(b) Fructose
(c) Sucrose
(d) Galactose
Answer:
(c) Sucrose

Question 15.
Lactose is composed of following components.
(a) glucose and fructose
(b) glucose and glucose
(c) glucose, fructose and galactose
(d) glucose and galactose
Answer:
(d) glucose and galactose

Question 16.
The simple polyhydroxy ketone molecule containing 3-7 carbons is a
(a) disaccharide
(b) monosaccharide
(c) polysaccharide
(d) dipeptide
Answer:
(b) monosaccharide

Plus One Zoology Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Biomolecules

Question 17.
How many of the twenty two amino acids are essential for children?
(a) 6
(b) 8
(c) 9
(d) 7
Answer:
(c) 9

Question 18.
Starch and cellulose are compounds of many units of
(a) glycerol
(b) amino acids
(c) simple sugars
(d) fatty acids
Answer:
(c) simple sugars

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Students can Download Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
_________ is a free and open source software for accounting, developed by Digital Freedom Foundation.
Answer:
GNUKhata

Question 2.
The first step in GNUKhata is ________
(a) To create an organisation
(b) To create Ledger account
(c) Voucher entry
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) To create an organisation

Question 3.
Write the path for starting GNUKhata
Answer:
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 4.
Which among the following is not a level of users in GNUKhata
(a) Managing Director
(b) Admin
(c) Manager
(d) Operator
Answer:
(a) Managing Director

Question 5.
GNUKhata has ………… (a) …………… predetermined groups and ……… (b) ……….. subgroups
Answer:
(a) 13
(b) 16

Question 6.
Amount received by way of cash or cheque is recorded in GNUKhata by using ________ voucher type
Answer:
Receipt Voucher (F4)

Question 7.
Short cut keys for activating Credit Note is _______
(a) Ctrl + 1
(b) Ctrl + 2
(c) Ctrl + 3
(d) Ctrl + 3
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + 3

Question 8.
To clone a voucher means
(a) To delete a voucher
(b) To copy a voucher
(c) To edit a voucher
(d) To print a voucher
Answer:
(b) To copy a voucher

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 9.
From ________ menu, we will enable to view Ledger,
Trial Balance, Balance sheet, Profit and Loss AC etc.
Answer:
Report menu

Question 10.
Which among the following is NOT a feature of GNUKhata?
(a) Free and open source accounting software
(b) Based on double entry book keeping
(c) Coding of Ledger account
(d) Linking of sales and purchase transactions to invoices
Answer:
(c) Coding of Ledger account

Question 11.
What is FOSS?
(a) Free and Open Security Software
(b) Financial Accounting Open Source Software
(c) Free and Open System Software
(d) Free and Open Source Software
Answer:
(c) Free and Open Source Software

Question 12.
Left side of the GNUKhata welcome screen shows __________
(a) Three buttons and dialog box
(b) Description about double entry principles
(c) Printer settings and network
(d) Description about the advantages and developer of GNUKhata
Answer:
(d) Description about the advantages and developer of GNUKhata

Question 13.
Short Cut keys Shift + Ctrl + R is used for ________
Answer:
Create Organisation

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 14.
Choose the statement which is NOT True
(a) We can create a new group but a new sub group can not be created
(b) We can not create a new group but a new sub group can be created
(c) We cannot delete a group or a sub group
(d) We cannot create a sub group of a sub group
Answer:
(a) We can create a new group but a new sub group can not be created

Question 15.
______________ is prepared by an account holder to check whether all cheques deposited by him are cleared and all cheques
issued by him are presented on not.
(a) Bank Reconciliation statement
(b) Trading, Profit and Loss Account & Balance Sheet
(c) Cash Book and Pass Book
(d) Trial Balance
Answer:
(a) Bank Reconciliation statement

Question 16.
Sub Group “Sundry Debtors” coming under ________ Group
Answer:
Current Asset

Question 17.
Choose the right statement
(a) Once organisation is created, the financial year can be changed whenever necessary
(b) Once organisation is created, the financial year can not be changed.
Answer:
(b) Once organisation is created, the financial year can not be changed.

Question 18.
Create is mandatory in GNUkhata
(a) Internal Auditor
(b) Operator
(c) Manager
(d) Admin
Answer:
(d) Admin

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 19.
Which one of the following is free and open source software for Accounting
(a) Tally
(b) PeechTree
(c) GNUKhata
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) GNUKhata

Question 20.
Which accounting software can be easily transformed into Indian languages?
Answer:
GNUKhata

Question 21.
When we open GNUKhata for the first time, we will see ______
(a) Create Organisation window
(b) Voucher Entry window
(c) Welcome screen
(d) User name and Password window
Answer:
(c) Welcome screen

Question 22.
Which type of organisation can be created in GNUKhata?
(a) Profit Making Organisations
(b) Not for Profit Organisations
(c) (a) and (b)
(d) None of these.
Answer:
(c) (a) and (b)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 23.
Only ______ user can log in as ‘Admin’
(а) One
(b) Two
(c) Many
(d) None
Answer:
(a) One

Question 24.
Write path for deleting an organisation.
Answer:
Log in as ‘Admin user’ → Administration menu → Select ‘Delete Organisation’.

Question 25.
The sub Group ‘Plant and Machinery’ is coming under _______________ group.
Answer:
Fixed Assets

Question 26.
Which among the following is not a Profit and loss A/c Group in GnuKhata.
(a) Direct Income
(b) Direct Expenses
(c) Indirect Income
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 27.
There are system generated ledger accounts in GNUkhata
(a) One
(b) Two
(c) Three
(d) Four
Answer:
(d) Four

Question 28.
In GNUKhata, while creating a Ledger account, we have to enter opening balance only if _________
(a) The account belongs to Trading, P/La/c group
(b) The account belongs to a Balance sheet group
(c) It is a cash account
(d) It is a Liability account
Answer:
(b) The account belongs to a Balance sheet group

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 29.
Contra Voucher is used to record.
(a) Deposits or withdrawals of cash from the bank
(b) Transfer of fund from one bank to another
(c) Transfer of cash to petty cash
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write the Path to display Trial Balance.
Answer:
Report → Trial Balance → Enter Date → Select Trial Balance Type → Click on view button

Question 2.
What is BRS?
Answer:
A Bank Reconciliation Statement (BRS) is a Statement prepared by the depositor for the purpose of reconciling the cash book balance with the pass book balance on a certain date.

Question 3.
There are four levels of users in GNUKhata. Who are they?
Answer:

  1. Admin
  2. Manager
  3. Operator.
  4. IntemalAuditor.

Question 4.
Match the following
Group Name Sub-Group Name

Group NameSub-Group Name
(a) Fixed Assets(i) Sundry Creditors
(b) Current Liability(ii) Loans and Advances
(c) Investments(iii) Furniture
(d) Current Assets(iv) Fixed Bank Deposits

Answer:
(a)- (iii); (b) – (i); (c) – (iv); (d) – (ii)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 5.
List down the Income and Expenditure account groups in GNUKhata
Answer:

  • Direct Income
  • Direct Expenses
  • Indirect Income
  • Indirect Expenses

Question 6.
Identify the group and sub group under which the following ledger accounts are to be created.
(a) Depreciation
(b) Carriage inward
(c) Bills Receivable
(d) Drawings
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 1

Question 7.
List down any two features of GNUKhata.
Answer:

  1. It is free and open source accounting software.
  2. It is based on double entry book keeping.
  3. All financial reports can be prepared.
  4. Display of dual ledger facility.
  5. Attachment of source document to vouchers is possible.
  6. Linking of sales ad purchases tranactions to invoice.
  7. Export or import of data from spread sheet is possible.
  8. It ensures password security and data audit facility.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 8.
Define Groups and Sub Groups in GNUKhata.
Answer:
Grouping of account is a method of organising the large number of ledger accounts into sequential arrangement. GNUKhata has 29 predefined Groups and Sub Groups. Out of these, 13 are Groups and 16are Sub Groups.

Question 9.
What are the three buttons in Right side of the GNUKhata welcome screen?
Answer:

  1. Select Existing Organisation
  2. Create Organisation
  3. Language

Question 10.
What is the use of ‘Theme’ tab in GNUKhata Menu Bar?
Answer:
‘Theme’ tab is used to change the theme Background of the screen.

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the specialities of system generated Ledger Accounts
Answer:

  1. GNUKhata has four system-generated ledger account.
  2. We cannot change the name of these accounts.
  3. We can not delete these accounts.

Question 2.
What are the limitations of GNUKhata?
Answer:

  1. Only trained employees can use GNUKhata.
  2. Updations and additions in GNUKhata Software may seriously affect the accounting system.

Question 3.
Mr. Roby prepared a chart for grouping the ledger account. Some errors are identified by his teacher. Help him to rectify the errors.

Ledger AccountGroup
(a) Office expensesDirect Expenses
(b) Carriage InwardDirect Expenses
(c) SalaryIndirect Expenses
(d) Sales TaxDirect Expenses
(e) PurchasesIndirect Expenses

Answer:

Ledger AccountGroup
(a) Office expensesIndirect Expenses
(b) Carriage InwardDirect Expenses
(c) SalaryIndirect Expenses
(d) Sales TaxIndirect Expenses
(e) PurchasesDirect Expenses

Question 4.
Three options are available to view Trail Balance. What are they?
Answer:

  1. Net Trial Balance
  2. Gross Trial Balance
  3. Extended Trial Balance

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 5.
Define the following
(a) Credit note voucher
(b) Journal voucher
(c) Sales voucher
Answer:

(a) Credit noteFor recording a reduction in the price charged to a customer. Function key: Ctrl + 3
(b) JournalFor recording rectifying entries, transfer entries, adjustment entries, purchase of fixed assets on credit and sale of fixed assets on credit.
Function key: F9
(c) SalesFor recording the return of goods by a customer
Function key: Ctrl + 1

Question 6.
Write the Debit and Credit for the following accounting Transactions
(a) Returned goods to Vinu Rs. 5000
(b) Price of goods sold to Mohan reduced by Rs. 500
(c) Vinu returned goods worth Rs. 3000
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 2

Question 7.
What is the importance of ‘Admin’ user in GNUKhata?
Answer:

  • Only one user can login as Admin
  • The creator of organisation is always considered as Admin User
  • The ‘Admin’ user can create the other users ‘Admin’ user

Question 8.
List down the major Sub Groups in the Group ‘Fixed Assets”?
Answer:

  • Building
  • Furniture
  • Land
  • Plant and Machinery

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 9.
Match the following
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 3
Answer:
(a) → ii → x
(b) → iii → y
(c) → i → z

Question 10.
Rearrange the diagram in the right way
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 4
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 5

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How to record the opening balance amount in opening Stock Account?
Answer:
stage 1:

  • Step 1 → Click on Master tab.
  • Step 2 → Select Edit account option from the drop down list.
  • Step 3 → Select Stock at the beginning from the edit account window.
  • Step 4 → Click on Edit Button.
  • Step 5 → Enter opening balance amount.
  • Step 6 → Click on Save button to save the amount.

Stage 2:

  • Step 1 → Click on Transaction tab.
  • Step 2 → Select Journal option to activate Journal Voucher.
  • Step 3 → Enter voucher number.
  • Step 4 → Enter opening date.
  • Step 5 → Select Opening stock a/c in Dr. Account and enter opening stock amount.
  • Step 6 → Select stock at the beginning a/c in the Cr. account and enter the opening stock amount.
  • Step 7 → Give narration.
  • Step 8 → Click on Save button or Press Enter key.

Question 2.
What are the reasons behind the difference in pass book balance and cash book balance.
(a) Cheques issued to suppliers, but not cleared
(b) Cheques deposited, but not honoured
(c) Accounts directly deposited by customers in bank account through electronic transfer
(d) Charges levied by the bank
(e) Interest on deposits credited by the bank
Answer:
S

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 3.
Give a brief explanation about Bank Reconciliation Statement in GNUKhata
Answer:

  1. Bank Reconciliation Statement is done to identify why there is difference between the two balances (Cash Book balance and pass book balance)
  2. The date of transaction is the Transaction Date
  3. The date on which a particular transaction appears in a Pass Book is called the Clearance Date.
  4. The period for which Bank Reconciliation is done is called Reconciliation Period.
  5. The reconciliation is done by comparing the Trans-action Date and Clearance Date.

Question 4.
GNUKhata provides the facility to view Single Ledger Account and Dual Ledger Account. Explain.
Answer:
GNUKhata provides the facility to view two ledger accounts simultaneously for comparing entries. We can view side by side:

  • Two different Ledger accounts for the same period.
  • Two different ledger accounts, each for different period.
  • Same ledger accounts for different periods.

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What do you mean by ‘Year End Activities’?
Answer:
Year End Activities consists of the following Year End Activities

  • Closing Ledger Accounts.
  • Opening Ledger Accounts for the next year.

(A) Closing of Accounts:
GNUKhata has a module to Close books at the click of a mouse, when this module is activated, balances in all expenses and incomes accounts are transferred to Profit and Loss/ Income & Expenditure account and the accounts are closed. After Close
books is done, transactions cannot be recorded but ledger accounts can be viewed.

(B) Opening Ledger Accounts for the next year:
GNUKhata has a module to Roll over ledger accounts at the click of a mouse. This module opens accounts for the next year automatically and since it is automatic, it is error free. When Roll over is done.

  • New organisation with the same name and type is created by GNUKhata for the next accounting year.
  • Assets and liabilities accounts automatically open under its respective Groups and Sub Groups with opening balances.
  • Expenses and income accounts are opened under their respective Groups and Sub Groups without opening balances
  • The closing stock gets transferred to the next year as opening stock.

This module can only be activated after close Books is done.

Question 2.
Write the steps in the preparation of final accounts by using GNUKhata.
Answer:

  • Step 1 – Creation of new organisation
  • Step 2 – Creation of Admin and Login
  • Step 3 – Creation of Sub Groups
  • Step 4 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
  • Step5 – Voucher Entry
  • Step 6 – Editing opening stock and Closing stock account
  • Step 7 – Display Ledger Accounts
  • Step 8 – Display Trial Balance
  • Step 9 – Display P & L Account
  • Step 10 – Display Balance Sheet

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 3.
What are the different vouchers in GNUKhata?
Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 6
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Five mark q3 img 38

Question 4.
Write the Journal entry, voucher Type and Short cut keys of the following transactions.

    1. Cash purchases worth Rs. 10,000
    2. Sold goods to Akhil Rs. 6, 000
    3. Akhil returned goods worth Rs. 2,000
    4. Price of goods sold to Akhil reduced by Rs. 500
    5. Credit Purchases from Linjo Rs, 8,000
    6. Returned goods to Linjo Rs. 3,000
  1. Linjo reduced the price of goods sold to us by Rs. 1,000
  2. Cash received from Akhil Rs.3,000
  3. Cash paid to Linjo Rs. 4,000
  4. Cash sales ₹ 800

Answer:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 7

Question 5.
Menu Bar has several Tabs. Can you list down a few of them? Also, mention the short cut keys and activities of such Tabs.
Answer:
Menubar has the following Tabs, The shortcuts for and the activities included in these Tabs are:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 8
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 9

Question 6.
Create an organisation with the following particulars.

  • Name: JOSHWIN ZIAN Enterprises
  • Accounting Year: 01-01-2018 to 31-12-2018
  • Type of organisation: Profit Making
  • Maintain Inventory: No
  • Records Admin Name and Password: Appu, Appose
  • Security Question & answer: Best friends name? Chikku
  • Address: 1234, M. C. Road, Velappaya, Tcr.

Answer:

  • Step1 – Start GNUKhata (Application → Office → GNUKhata)
  • Step 2 – Click on “Create Organisation”.
  • Step 3 – Enter Organisation Name (JOSHWIN ZIAN Enterprises), Press Enter/Tab
  • Step 4 – Select the case, Use down arrow key to select any one of the case and press Enter
  • Step 5 – Select organisation type – ‘Profit making’ and press Enter/Tab
  • Step 6 – Enter From date – 01-01-2018, Press Enter
  • Step 7- Skip the box of Inventory
  • Step 8 – Click on Proceed or Press Enter to open Create Admin window
  • Step 9 – Enter user Name – Appu, Password – Appose and Press Enter/ Tab
  • Step 10 – Enter security Question – “Best friends’s Name’, Press Enter/Tab
  • Step 11 – Enter Answer to security Question Chikku, Press Enter to Login as Admin
  • Step 12 – Select Edit organisation particulars from Master Menu
  • Step13 – Enter Organisation – 1234, MC Road, Velappaya, TCr, and Click on Save

Plus Two Accountancy Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata Practical Work Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Create an organisation with the following particulars

  • Name: TALLMEN WELFARE ASSOCIATION
  • Accounting year: 1-1-2018 to 31-12-2018
  • Type of organisation: Not for profit
  • Maintain Inventory Records: No
  • Admin Name & password: Visal, TCR2018
  • Security Question and Answer Mothers’maiden name? Meenakshy

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Procedure:
Step 1 – Start GNUKhata
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create New Organisation
Click on ‘Create Organisation’ Tab Enter the following informations.

  • Organisation Name: TALLMEN WELFARE ASSOCATION
  • Case: As-Is
  • Organisation type: Not for Profit
  • Financial year: 1-1 -2018 to 31-12-2018
  • Inventory: (Leave it blank)

Click on the Proceed button. Now the organisation is created

Step 3 – Create Admin and Login
Press Enter or Alt+Shift+P to Open Create Admin module.

  • User Name: Visal
  • Password: TCR2018
  • Confirm Password: Retype the password
  • Security Question: Mothers’ Maiden name
  • Answer to the security Question: Meenakshy

Press enter to Login as Admin

Step 4 – Select Edit organisation Particulars from Master Menu. Enter the address of the organisation. Press Enter key to save the details.
Output:

Question 2.
Create an organisation with the following particulars:

  • Name: Mahindra Enterprises
  • Accounting year: 1-04-2018 to 31-3-2019
  • Type of organisation: Profit-making
  • Maintain inventory Records: No
  • Admin Name & Password: Vinesh, Vinumon
  • Security Question & answer: Best friend’s name? Rohit
  • Address: 268, Poonkunnam, Thrissur

Procedure:
Step 1 – Start GNUKhata
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create New Organisation Click on ‘Create Organisation’ Tab
Enter the following informations.

  • Organisation Name: Mahindra Enterprises
  • Case: As-Is
  • Organisation Type: Profit Making
  • Financial year: 1-04-2018 to 31-3-2019
  • Inventory : (Leave it blank)

Click on the Proceed button, is created. Now the organisation

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Step 3 – Create Admin and Login
Press Enter or Alt+Shift+P to Open Create Admin module.

  • User Name: Vinesh
  • Password: Vinumon
  • Confirm Password: Retype the password
  • Security Question: Best friend’s name?
  • Answer to the security Question: Rohit

Press enter to log in as Admin

Step 4 – Select Edit organisation Particulars from Master Menu. Enter the address of the organisation
Press Enter key to save the details.
Output:

Question 3.
Create the following ledger accounts of Najim Traders
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 10
procedure:
Step 1 – Create a New Organisation ‘Najim Traders’- Profit Making with other imaginary data.

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master menu → Create Account
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 11

Step 3 – Create all the ledger accounts and save the details

Step 4 – Display ledger Accounts Report → Ledger view
OR
Display Trial Balance ReportTrial balance → (Select the type of Trial balance) → view
Output:

Question 4.
Create the following Ledger accounts of Anusree agencies.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 12
procedure:
Step 1 – Create New Organisation ‘Anusree Agencies’ – Profit Making with other imaginary data
Enter the following information.

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master Menu → Create Account
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 13
Question 5.
Record the following transactions in appropriate vouchers

  • 1/6/2018 – Riyas started a business with cash – Rs. 1,00,000
  • 2/6/2018 – Opened a bank account with Canara Bank – Rs. 30,000
  • 3/6/2018 – Bought furniture for cash – Rs.10,000
  • 4/6/2018 – Purchase goods from Niyastores – Rs,25,000
  • 5/6/2018 – Cash sales – Rs.12,500
  • 6/6/2018 – Paid for stationery – Rs. 500
  • 7/6/2018 – Cash paid to Niya stores – Rs. 20,000
  • 8/6/2018 – Cash withdraw from Canara bank – Rs.10,000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Procedure:
Step 1 – Create a New Organisation – Profit Making – with imaginary data

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master menu → Create Account
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 14
Step 3 – Create all the ledger accounts and save the details

Step 4 – Enter all the transactions in appropriate vouchers

  1. Select the appropriate voucher form Voucher menu
  2. Enter the Voucher Number and date
  3. Select the Debit account name and enter the amount, then press Enter
  4. Select the credit account name and enter the amount
  5. Enter narration and click on Save.

Output:

Question 6.
Enter the following transactions of Royal Enterprises and display Trial Balance
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 15
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Application Office GNUkhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation “Royal Enterprises – Profit making – with Imaginary data.

Step 3 – Create Admin
Enter the details (Imaginary)

Step 4 – Create appropriate Ledger Accounts
Master → Create account → Select Group → Sub Group → Type Account name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 16

Step 5 – Enter all transactions in appropriate vouchers
Voucher menu → (appropriate voucher) → Enter voucher number → Date → Select Debit account → enter debit amount → Press Enter → Select Credit Account → Enter credit amount → Press Enters → Enter narration → Click on Save

Step 6 – Display Trial balance Report → Trial Balance
Output:

Question 7.
From the following Trial Balance, Prepare Trading Profit and loss account and Balance sheet of Athulya Ltd. as on 31/3/2018
Trial Balance as on 1/4/2017
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 17
Transaction during the year 2017 – 18 is given below

  • Sales (Cash) – Rs. 51000
  • Sales (Credit) – Rs. 34000
  • Purchases (Credit) – Rs. 68000
  • Office expenses – Rs. 2400
  • Wages. – Rs. 1.600
  • Cash received from Debtors – Rs. 16,000
  • Cash paid to creditors – Rs. 35,000
  • Discount received – Rs. 1000
  • Salary – Rs. 5000
  • Rent – Rs. 11,000
  • Carriage Outward – Rs. 700
  • Commission Paid – Rs. 500
  • Insurance Premium – Rs. 4000

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Other Adjustments:

  • Salalry Prepaid – Rs. 1500
  • Rent outstanding – Rs. 1000
  • Wages Outstnading – Rs. 800
  • Insurance Premium prepaid – Rs. 2000
  • Closing stock – Rs. 3700
  • Depreciation of Machinery – Rs. 10%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Create an organisation Athulya Ltd- Profit making for the year 1 -4-2017 to 31/3/2018 with imaginary data.

Step 2 – Creation of Ledger Accounts
Master → Create account
Analysis Table (Trail Balance)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 18
Create all the ledger a/c under appropriate group and sub Group.

Step 3 – Voucher Entry
Enter all the transactions using appropriate voucher type
Voucher menu /Transaction menu → Select appropriate voucher type → Enter voucher number → Enter voucher Date → Enter Debit account and amount → Enter Credit account and amount → Save
Analysis Table (Transactions)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 19
Analysis Table (Transactions)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 20

Step 4 – Enter the value of opening stock and closing stock

  1. Master menu → Edit Account → Select Stock at the beginning a/c → Click Edit Button
  2. Enter 14000 as Opening Balance. Click on Save button
  3. Enter the values of Opening Stock and closing stock through appropriate voucher

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Voucher menu/Transaction menu → Journal
Analysis Table (Stock)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 21

Step 5 – Display Trial Balance
Report → Trial Balance → Enter Date → Type → Click on the View button

Step 6 – Display Profit and loss Account
Report → Profit and loss → Enter Date → Click on View Button

Step 7 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance sheet → Enter Date → Type → Click on View Button
Output:

Question 8.
Prepare a Bank Reconciliation Statement of Cili Traders, a Profit making organisation, for the period 1-1-2018 to 31-3-2018
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 22
While comparing with Cash book with Pass book, the following details were noted.

  1. Clearance date of cheque No.7125 was on 7/4/18
  2. Cheque No. 9614 cleared only on 2/4/2018
  3. Cheque No. 7127 is cleared on 1/4/18
  4. Clearance date of cheque No.4528 was on 12/2/18
  5. Cheque No. 7129 was cleared on 19/3/2018
  6. All other transaction’s clearance date is same as transaction date

procedure:
Step 1 – Start GNUKhata
Application → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Create an organisation → Cili Traders → Profit making → 1-1-18 to 31-12-2018 → Create admin with imaginary data.

Step 3 – Create Ledger accounts
Master Menu → Create Account → Select Group → SubGroup → Account Name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 23

Step 4 – Voucher Entry
Transaction/Voucher → Select appropriate voucher → Number → Date → DebitCredit → Save

Step 5 – Preparation of Bank Reconciliation Statement Press Alt +R

OR

  1. Master → Bank rEconciliation statement → Select Bank’s Name (Canara Bank) → Set Reconciliation period → Click on view button to view Bank reconciliation screen
  2. Enter clearance date → Click on View statement button
  3. To show the cleared Transactions, click on cleared items
  4. To show the uncleared transactions, click on uncleared items

Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 9.
Enter the following transactions of Sibi Traders and Display Final Accounts as on 31/3/2018
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 24
procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Application Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Click on Create organisation → Enter Details → Sibi Traders → Proft Making → 1-1-2018 to 31-12-2018

Step 3 – Create Admin
Enter imaginary data

Step 4 – Creation of Ledger accounts
Master Menu → Create account → Select Group → SubGroup → Type Account name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 25
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 26

Step 5 – Voucher Entry (based on above Analysis Table)
Transaction menu/Voucher menu → Select appropriate voucher → Enter voucher No → Date → Debit account and amount → Credit account and amount → Narration → Save

Step 6 – Display Trial balance
Report → Trial balance
Display Profits and loss Account
Report → Profits Loss account

Step 8 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance sheet
Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 10.
From the following transactions of Fijo and Joshy associates, prepare Trial Balance, Trading Profit, and Loss account and Balance Sheet.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 27
Adjustments

  1. Depreciation of Furniture Rs. 640
  2. Closing stock valued at Rs.2900

Procedure:
Step 1 – Create Organisation
Click on create Organisation Tab Enter the details
Fijo and Joshy Associates – Profit Making- 1/1/2018-31/12/2018. Enter all other details with imaginary data.

Step 2 – Create Ledger Account
Master → Create Account
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 28
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 29
Create all the above ledger accounts under appropriate Groups and Subgroups.

Step 3 – Voucher Entry
Enter the adjustment entries in appropriate voucher type
Voucher menu/Transaction menu → Select Voucher type → Number → Date → Debit & Credit → Save
Analysis Table (Adjustments)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 29
Step 4 – Display Trial Balance
Report → Trial Balance

Step 5 – Display Profit & Loss Account
Reports → Profit & Loss Account

Step 6 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance Sheet
Output:

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Question 11.
Given below the Trial Balance of Akhil &Athulya associates as a 31/3/2018. Prepare Final Account for the year 2018-19
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 31
Other Information:

  1. Depreciation of Machinery-4500
  2. Rent outstanding-3000
  3. Building depreciated at 1.0%
  4. Salary Outstanding – 3500
  5. Value of closing stock -18000
  6. Value of Motor vehicle depreciated by 5%

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Applications → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Click on Create Organisation tab. Enter the details
Akhil and Athulya Associates – Profit making 1-4-2018 to 31-3-2019.

Step 3 – Create Admin & Login Use imaginary data.

Step 4 – Creation of new subgroup
Here we need to create a new Sub Group Vehicles under the Group Fixed Assets. Master → Create Account → Select Group Fixed Assets → Select New Sub Group in Sub Group Name → Enter the new Sub Group Name ‘Vehicles’ → Enter the Account Name Motor Vehicles in that Sub Groups Enter the Opening Balance Rs. 1,50, 000 → Save.

Step 5 – Create Ledger Account
Master → Create Account
Analysis Table (Trial Balance)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 32
Create all the ledger accounts under ap¬propriate Groups and Sub Groups

Step 6 – Voucher Entry
Enter all adjustments in appropriate voucher type
Voucher menu/Transaction Menu → Select Voucher → Type → Number → Date Debit account and amount → Credit account and amount → Save.
Analysis Table (Adjustments)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 33

Step 7 – Enter the value of opening stock and closing stock

  1. Master Menu → Edit Account → Select stock at the beginning a/c → Click Edit button
  2. Enter 15000 as opening balances click on. Save button
  3. Enter the values of opening stock and closing stock through appropriate voucher

Voucher Menu/Transaction menu → Journal
Analysis Table (Stock)
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 34

Step 8 – Display Trial Balance
Report → Trial Balance

Step 9 – Display profit and loss Account
Report → Profit & Loss

Step 10 – Display Balance Sheet
Report → Balance Sheet
Output:

Question 12.
Enter the following transactions in appropriate vouchers of Jos & Rejina Enterprises and prepare Bank Reconciliation Statement
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 35
Verification of the Cash Book with Bank Pass Book revealed that the Cheque Nos. 8117, 8238 & 5314 were cahsed only on 3rd, 5th and 8th July respectively and the clearance date of all other transactions are same as transaction date.
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open GNUKhata
Application → Office → GNUKhata

Step 2 – Create Organisation
Click on Create Organisation → Enter Name → Jos & Rejina Enterprises – Profit Making → (other imaginary data)

Step 3 – Create Admin – Enter the details (imaginary Data)

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata

Step 4 – Create Ledger Account
Master → Create account → Select Group → Sub Group → Type Account name → Save
Analysis Table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 36
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Accounting Software Package – GNUKhata - 37
Step 5 – VoucherEntry
Transaction / Voucher → Select Appropriate → Enter details.

Step 6 – Preparation of Bank reconciliation statement Press Alt + R
OR

    1. Master → Bank Reconciliation statement → Select Bank’s Name (Union Bank) → Set Reconciliation period → Click on the View button to view Bank Reconciliation screen
    2. Enter clearance data Click on View Statement button
    3. To show the cleared Reconciliation click on cleared items
    4. To know the uncleared Transactions, Click on Uncleared items.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Students can Download Chapter 4 Web Technology Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Specify an attribute of HTML tag.
Answer:
DIR: Indicates documents direction. It can take values rtl or Itr.
Eg. <HTML DIR= “rtl”> This specify that document is to read from right to left.

Question 2.
Mention the default value of size attribute of <BASEFONT>tag.
Answer:
3.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 3.
Name the tag which has ‘Noshade’ attribute.
Answer:
<HR> Tag

Question 4.
Maximum possible value of the size attribute of the <BASEFONT>tag?
Answer:
7.

Question 5.
Salim developed a personal website. In which he has to create an e-mail link. Can you suggest the protocol used to achieve this task?
Answer:
Mailto:
Eg. <A href= “Mailto:[email protected]” >Mail to me</A>.

Question 6.
You want to connect your webpage to the web portal www.yahoo.com. Mention the tag that can be used for this.
Answer:
<A> Anchor Tag
Eg. <A href=”www.yahoo.com”>Yahoo</A>

Question 7.
Specify the main attribute of <IMG> tag used to include an image file in web page.
Answer:
SRC. It specify the name of the image file to be included in the page.
Eg. <IMG SRC=“C:/home,Jpg”>

Question 8.
Select the attribute associated with <IMG> tag from the following: (Name, size, Align, value)
Answer:
Align.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 9.
Write HTML code forgiving hyper link in webpage.
Answer:
<A HREF= “page2.htm”>Page2</A>

Question 10.
The default colour of Vlink is______.
(a) Blue
(b) Green
(c) Red
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(c) Red

Question 11.
The default colour of A link is______.
(a) Blue
(b) Green
(c) Red
(d) Yellow
Answer:
(b) Green

Question 12.
Saritha is assigned with a task of writing explana¬tory notes in an HTML code. Which tag she can utilize.
Answer:
Explanatory notes can be given using <comment> tag. Using two mark up elements. as<!—and →

Question 13.
Pick the odd man out.
(a) BODY
(b) HTML
(c) CENTER
(d) ALIGN
Answer:
(d) ALIGN, all others are tag.

Question 14.
Your school has a web site, www.myschool.org. You want to create a link to this site from your website. Write the code for implementing this.
Answer:
<A href=”www. myschool.org”>My School</A>

Question 15.
HTML was developed by_______.
Answer:
Tim Berners-Lee.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 16.
What are the two major sections of an HTML document?
Answer:
Head section and Body section.

Question 17.
An HTML file is saved with______extension.
(a) .vbp
(b) .mdb
(c) .htm
(d) .fnm
Answer:
(c) .htm or .html

Question 18.
The software used to view web page is______.
(a) Notepad
(b) Web Browser
(c) Web server
(d) Web Editor
Answer:
(b) Web Browser

Question 19.
The default alignment of image in HTML is______.
(a) Left
(b) Right
(c) Center
(d) Inline with content
Answer:
(a) Left

Question 20.
______is an alternative for centralizing a paragraph other than using <P> tag
(a) <ALIGN>
(b) <C>
(c) <CENTER>
(d) <CENTRE
Answer:
(d) <CENTER>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 21.
_______attribute of <A> tag specifies the URL of the hyper linked document.
(a) Name
(b) Target
(c) HREF
(d) SRC
Answer:
(c) HREF

Question 22.
What does HTML stands for?
Answer:
HyperText Markup Language.

Question 23.
Communication on web can be classified into_____and______.
Answer:
Client to Server and Server to Server

Question 24.
The protocol which is responsible for splitting the data into smaller packets is______.
Answer:
TCP

Question 25.
The protocol which is responsible for the routing of data packets through the correct destination is____.
Answer:
IP (Internet Protocol)

Question 26.
TCP / IP stands for_____.
Answer:
Transmission Control Protocol/lntemet Protocal.

Question 27.
Identify the protocol responsible fore-mail commu-nication.
(a) DNS
(b) HTTP
(c) TCP/IP
(d) SMTP
Answer:
(d) SMTP

Question 28.
In server to server communication, authentication is done with help of______.
(a) HTTP
(b) Digital certificate
(c) Client
(d) DNS
Answer:
(b) Digital certificate

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 29.
Which server acts between merchant server and bank server for transferring data in encrypted format?
Answer:
Payment Gateway.

Question 30.
Identify the name of a place where servers and networking systems are placed with high security,
(a) Head office
(b) DNS
(c) Data centre
(d) IIS
Answer:
(c) Data centre

Question 31.
Identify the port number which request for the service of sending e-mail communication.
(a) 22
(b) 25
(c) 53
(d) 80
Answer:
(b) 25

Question 32.
The IP address corresponding to a domain name is present in____server.
Answer:
DNS

Question 33.
Programs embedded in HTML documents are termed as____.
Answer:
Scripts

Question 34.
Running of ______scripts can be blocked by the user.
(a) Client side
(b) Server side
(c) Both client side and server side
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Client side

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 35.
A platform-independent server-side scripting language is_____.
Answer:
PHP

Question 36.
Which among the following tools is used for easy formatting and defining style of a document written in HTML?
(a) Ajax
(b) CSS
(c) JSP
(d) JavaScript
Answer:
(b) CSS

Question 37.
Pick the Odd one from the following list and give reason. (IMG, FONT, BR, ALIGN, PRE)
Answer:
ALIGN which is an attribute, all others are tags.

Question 38.
Choose the correct HTML statement to display an image with file name “kerala.jpg” as the background of the web page.
(a) <IMG src=”kerala.jpg”>
(b) <BODY src=”kerala.jpg”>
(c) <BODY bgcolor=”kerala.jpg”>
(d) <BODY background=”kerala.jpg”>
Answer:
(d) <BODYbackground=”kerala.jpg”>

Question 39.
Two ofthe following HTMLtags have same attribute Align’. Identify them. (<IMG>, <MARQUEE>, <B>, <P>, <BODY>)
Answer:
<IMG> AND <P>

Question 40.
Identify the correct HTML statement to draw a hori-zontal line with half the width of the screen.
(a) <HR width=“50%” size= “3″>
(b) <HR length=“50%” size= “3″>
(c) <HR size= “50%” width= “3″>
(d) <HR width= “50%” length= “3″>
Answer:
(a) <HR width=“50%” size= “3″>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 41.
A student wants to display a poem in a web page just like as he entered in the text editor. Which tag in HTML will help him?
Answer:
<PRE>tag

Question 42.
A student created a webpage about his school. The school name is displayed in the page. He wanted to change the style, colour, and size of the school name. Identify the most appropriate tag in HTML needed for that.
Answer:
<FONT> tag

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
A student developed a web page about India. He wanted to display a scrolling text moving from right side to left side with a background colour blue. The text is “I Love My Country”.

  1. Identify the tag needed for it.
  2. Write the HTML statement to do the task.

Answer:

  1. <MARQUEE>
  2. <MARQUEE direction-’left” bgcolor=”blue” > I Love My country </MARQUEE>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Write HTML statement for displaying the following text items:

  1. A2B3
  2. A>B

Answer:

  1. A<SUB> 2 </SUB> B <SUP>3</SUP>
  2. A&gt;

Question 3.
Two HTML tags are given. They are <BODY> and <FONT>. Identify and write the attribute of each from the following list. (Size, Text, Link, Bgcolor, Color).
Answer:
The attributes of <BODY> tag are Text, Link and Bgcolor The attributes of <FONT> tag are size and color.

Question 4.
Write the use of Border and Aft attribute of <IMG> tag.
Answer:
Border: This attribute is used forgiving border to an image.

Alt: This attribute issued forgiving an alternate text. When there is no image in the specified location or the browser doesn’t support the image them this text will be displayed.

Question 5.
When a client send request to a server, the server must know which service is demanded by the client.

  1. How does the server identify the type of service requested?
  2. Write the name of any one of the services in the web server.

Answer:

  1. Port number
  2. Any service like FTP, SMTP, HTTP, etc.

Question 6.
Following are steps for searching the IP address of a domain name by a browser. Rearrange them in proper order.
(a) Look in the local memory of ISP
(b) Look in the DNS servers starting from the root server
(c) Look in the local memory of brower
(d) Look in the local memory of Operating System
Answer:
Correct order is c, d, a, b.

Question 7.
Categorise the following tags into Containertags and empty tags.
<B>, <BR>,<A> ,<FRAME>, <FRAMESET>,<LI>, <HR>
Answer:
1. Container tags:
<B>,<A> <FRAMESET>

2. Empty tags:
<BR>,<HR>,<LI>, <FRAME>.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 8.
Write the HTML statement to get the following output.

  1. Commerce
  2. Humanities

Answer:

  1. <B>Commerce</B>
  2. <l>Humanities</l>

Question 9.
Write the HTML statement to get the following output.

  1. H2S04
  2. a2 + b2
  3. Computer

Answer:

  1. H<sub>2</sub>SO<sub>4</sub>
  2. a<sup>2</sup> + b <sup>2</sup>
  3. <b>Computer</b>

Question 10.
Write HTML code to display as follows. The <IMG> tag is used for placing images.
Answer:
The & lt IMG &gt tag is used for placing images.

Question 11.
Name some browsers.
Answer:

  1. Internet Explorer
  2. Netscape Navigator
  3. Opera
  4. Eudora

Question 12.
What is a website?
Answer:
A website is a collection of webpages. A webpage is created by using HTML tags.

Question 13.
What is the role of attributes in an HTML tag?
Answer:
Attributes are parameters for providing additional information within a tag. Attribute values specify certain characteristics of the tag.
Eg: <P align=”right”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 14.
What is an HTML?
Answer:
HTML stands for Hyper Text Markup Language. It is used to create webpages. It has two types of tags empty and container. The important thing we have to remember in container tag is first opened tag must be closed last.

Question 15.
Name the main attributes of <HR> tag.
Answer:

  1. Size: It specifies the line thickness.
  2. Width: It specifies the length
  3. Noshade: It specifies no shade is given for the line.
  4. Color: It specifies the color.

Question 16.
Mary wants to display her name in various headings. Name the heading tags available in HTML.
Answer:
Heading can be given in six levels from <H1> to <H6>.The tag <H1 > produces big heading. The tag <H6> produces small heading. The heading size reduce from <H1> to <H6> sequentially.

Question 17.
Differentiate between <FONT>and<BASEFONT>tags.
Answer:
<BASEFONT>tag sets the normal font for the entire document text. The font specified will be taken as the default font for the entire document. The main attributes are size, face, and color.

The <FONT> tag defines the font characteristics of the text enclosed. <Font> tag change the font property of the text enclosed within <Font> and</Font> whereas <BaseForrt> tag specifies the default font characteristics.

Question 18.
Explain the different types of hyperlinks.
Answer:
The two types of Hyper Links are

  1. External Hyper Link: This is used two connect the locations of two different web pages
  2. Internal Hyper Link: This is used to connect the different locations of the same web page.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 19.
Write the HTML code to display the following list:

  1. Form
  2. TextBox
  3. Label
  4. Command Button

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers 1

Question 20.
The body section forms the content displayed in the browser window. Briefly explain any four attributes in the BODY tag.
Answer:

  1. Bgcolor – It is used to set background colour.
  2. Background – It is used to set a background picture.
  3. Text – it is used to set the foreground colour.
  4. Left margin – It is used to set the left margin.

Question 21.
HTML has the facility to provide External links as well as Internal links.

  1. Which tag is used to include an External link?
  2. How will you construct an Internal link?

Answer:
1. Anchor Tag i.e. <a href=”filename”>

2. Internal link is used to link two places of the same web page
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers 2
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Two Mark Questions and Answers 3

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 22.
Categorise the following tags in HTML and write the criterian for the categorisation.
<BR>, <P>, <BODY>, <B>, <HR>, <IMG>
Answer:

Empty_tagContainer tag
<BR><P>
<HR><BODY>
<IMG><B>

Question 23.
Differentiate empty tags and container tag with example.
Answer:
1. Empty tags: It has opening tag only, no closing tag
Eg: <hr>, <br> etc.

2. Container tag: It as both opening and closing tag.
Eg: <html> </html>
<body></body>etc.

Question 24.
Write True or False

  1. Text is an attribute of <BODY> tag to insert a text matter in the web page.
  2. <EM>tagfunctionssimilarto<l>tag.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True.

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Write and explain any four text formatting tags in HTML.
Answer:
Text formatting tags are given below.

  1. <B> – This tag is based to make the text Bold Eg: <B> Computer application </B>
  2. <l>: This tag is used to make the text in italics eg: <l> computer aplication</l>
  3. <U>:This tag is used to underline the text eg: <U> computer aplication</U>
  4. <S>: This tag is used for striking out the text eg: <S> computer aplication</S>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Match the following.
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 4
Answer:
Correct match as given below
<H2> -Heading-Align
<MARQUEE> – Scrolling text – Bgcolor
<IMG> – Inserting picture – Src.

Question 3.
Briefly explain the use of tags <Q>, <PRE> and <ADDRESS> tags.
Answer:

  • <Q>: It is used to give text within double-quotes.
  • <PRE>: This tag is used to display the content as we entered in the text editor.
  • <ADDRESS>: This tag is used to provide information of the author or owner.

Question 4.
Write a HTML code to develop a web page about Kerala state as shown below:

KERALA STATE
God’s Own Country
Capital: Thiruvananthapuram

The specifications for the page are:

  1. The main heading must be of bigger in size, centralised and bold.
  2. Sub headings must be lesser size than main heading and in italics.
  3. There should be a picture at the center of the page with file name“tree.jpg”.
  4. The background colour of the page must me blue.

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 5

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 5.
PHP is a popular scripting language.

  1. Write whether it is client side or server side.
  2. Write a brief note on PHP.

Answer:

  1. Server side
  2. PHP (PHP Hypertext Preprocessor)
    • It is an open-source, general-purpose scripting language.
    • It is a server side scripting language
    • Introduced by Rasmus Lendorf
    • A PHP file with extension .php
    • It support data base programming the default DBMS is MySQL
    • It is platform-independent
    • PHP interpreter in Linux is LAMP(Linux, Apache, MySQL, PHP)

Question 6.
How client side scripting differs from server side scripting?
Answer:
Following are the differences

Client Side ScriptingServer Side Scripting
Script is copied to client browserto the web server
Executed by the clientExecuted by the server and result is get back to the browser window
Used for Client level validationConnect to the database in the server
It is possible to block by the userCannot possible
Client side scripts depends the type and version of the browserIt does not depend the type and version of the browser

Question 7.
Briefly explain the two types of communication on the web.
Answer:
The two types of communication on the web are given below.
1. Client to Web server communication:
This communication is carried out between client to the web server (shopping site). The technology used to protect data that are transferred from client to web server is https.

2. Web sever to web server communication:
This communication is usually carried out between web .sever (seller) to another web server (normally bank). For the safe transaction. Digital certificate issued by third party web sites are used.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 8.
Compare static and dynamic web pages.
Answer:

Static web pagesDynamic web pages
Content and layout is fixedContent and layout is changed frequently
Never use databaseData base is used
Run by browserIt runs on the server and result get back to the client(browser)
Easy to developNot at all easy

Question 9.
Differentiate Empty tag and Containertag.
Answer:
There are two types of tags, opening tag, and closing tag

  • Empty tag: It has only opening tag and no closing tag
    Eg: <br>, <hr>,..
  • Container tag: It has both opening and closing tags. These tag contains some text data Eg:<html>,<head>,<body>,….

Question 10.
Create a webpage using HTML to display the following message. ‘The symbol H2O represents water’.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 6

Question 11.
While designing a webpage Neena wants to explain the meaning of each step. Can you help her?
Answer:
Neena can use Comments while writing the code. It is a good programming practice. Comments improve readability. It is not the part of a program. Comments
<!—and — >
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 7

Question 12.
Complete the following table.

RGB codeColour Name
#0000FF_________
________Yellow
#FF0000_________
#00FF00_________
________White
________Black

Answer:

RGB codeColour Name
#0000FFBlue
#FFFF00Yellow
#FF0000Red
#00FF00Green
#FFFFFFWhite
#000000Black

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 13.
Give HTML tag to display the sentence “WELCOME TO HTML” as centralized heading, having red colour.
Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Three Mark Questions and Answers 8

Question 14.
Explain the Main attributes of font tag.
Answer:
<FONT>tag defines the font properties of text enclosed
The main attributes are

  1. Face-This specifies the type of font.
  2. Color-This specifies the colour of the text enclosed
  3. Size- This specifies the font size

Eg. <FONT Face= “Arial” size = “3” color= “magenta”>

Question 15.
John visited a website, it is found that when clicking on a particular text the browser open a new web page. Name the feature and Identify the tag used for this purpose. Write the HTML code to link to a file name “main.html”.
Answer:

  1. Hyper Linking. By clicking on hypertext we can see or go to other webpages or to other section of same document.
  2. <A> tag is used
  3. <Ahref=”main.html”>Main</A>

Question 16.
Antony visited his school website, he could not see the picture of his school instead of that there is a text message “Your browser could not support images”. Why it is happened and write the html code for this.
Answer:
Because the browser he used cannot load the image. He can use Alt attribute of IMG Tag.
<IMG SRC =” D:\school.jpg” Alt=“Your browser could not support images”>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 17.
Suppose you want to display a picture named school.jpg located in the ‘Photos’ sub directory of the directory ‘My documents’ of C drive in your web page.

  1. Name the tag used for this purpose.
  2. Write HTML code for the web page.

Answer:
1. <IMG>tag. It is used to display images in webpage

2. <HEAD><TITLE>
</HEAD>
<Body>
<IMG SRC= ‘C;/My documents/Photos/School.jpg’>
</Body>
<html>

Plus Two Computer Application Web Technology Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain the main list tags in HTML?
Answer:
HTML provides three basic types of lists-unordered, ordered and definition list.
1. Unordered list:
Unordered list arranges the list items with bullet symbols in front. <UL> and </UL> tag encloses an Unondered list. List items are specified by <LI> tag. The tag <UL> can take values square, circle or disc. The default type is disc.
Eg : <UL>
<LI>COMPUTER
<LI>BIOLOGY
</UL>

2. Ordered list:
In Ordered list, the list items are numbered in sequence. <OL> and </OL> tag encloses an Or-dered list. List items are specified by <LI> tag. The tag <OL> can take values as follows

  • type = 1 for 1, 2, 3,….
  • type = i for i, ii, iii,……
  • type = I for I, II, III,……
  • type = a for a, b, c,…
  • type = A for A, B, C,…..

Eg :<OL>
<LI>COMPUTER
<LI>BIOLOGY
</OL>

3. Definition List:
It is formed by a group of definitions and their descriptions. No bullet symbol or number is provided for the list items. The <DL> and </DL> tags enclose the definition list. The <DT> tag contains the definition term and <DD> tag specifies the description.
Eg: <DL>
<DT>Eeheque
<DD>Electronic cheque
</DL>

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 4 Web Technology

Question 2.
Explain the use of <BODY> tag and list any four of its attributes
Answer:
Web page contents are given int the body section. Attributes of body tag are:

  1. BGCOLOR-Specifies background color for the document Body
    Eg. <BODY BGCOLOR= “RED”>
  2. BACKGROUND -Sets the image as background for the document body
    Eg. <BODY BACKGROUNG= “C:\result.jpg”>
  3. TEXT-Specifies the color of the text content of the page
    Eg. <BODYTEXT= “Red”>
  4. LINK- Specifies colour of the hyperlinks that are not visited by the user
  5. ALINK-Specifies the colour of hyperlinks
  6. VLINK-Specifies the color of hyperlinks which are already visited by the viewer.
    Eg. < BODY ALINK= “Cyan” LINK=” Magenta” VLINK= “Orange’’> *
  7. Left margin and Right margin-Sets margin from left and top of the document window.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Students can Download Chapter 3 Functions Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Plus Two Computer Application Functions One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
To read a single character for gender i.e. ’rri’ or ’f’.___function is used.
(a) getch()
(b) getchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getline()
Answer:
(b) getchar()

Question 2.
To use getchar(), putchar(), gets() and puts(), which header file is used?
(a) iostream
(b) cstdio
(c) input
(d) output
Answer:
(b) cstdio

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 3.
To use cin and cout, which header file is needed?
(a) iostream
(b) cstdio
(c) input
(d) output
Answer:
(a) iostrem

Question 4.
Predict the output of the following code snippet
#include<cstdio>
int main()
{
char name[ ] = “ADELINE”;
for(int i=0; name[i]!=’\0′;i++)
putchar(name[i]);
}
Answer:
The output is “ADELINE”.

Question 5.
From the following which is equivalent to the function getc(stdin)
(a) putchar()
(b) gets()
(c) getchar()
(d) puts()
Answer:
(c) getchar()

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 6.
From the following which is equivalent to the function putc(ch,stdout)
(a) putchar(ch)
(b) ch=gets()
(c) ch=getchar()
(d) puts(ch)
Answer:
(a) putchar(ch)

Question 7.
To print a single character at a time which function is used?
(a) puts()
(b) putchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(b) putchar()

Question 8.
To read a string____function is used.
(?) puts()
(b) putchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(b) gets()

Question 9.
To print a string_____function is used.
(a) puts()
(b) putchar()
(c) gets()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(b) puts()

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 10.
Consider the following code snippet
main()
{
char str[80];
gets(str);
for(int i=0,len=0;str[i]!-\0′;i++,len++);
cout<<“The length of the string is” <<len;
getch();
}
Select the equivalent for the under lined statement from the following
(a) int len= strlen(str)
(b) int len=strcmp(str)
(c) int len = strcount(str)
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) int len= strlen(str)

Question 11.
Arjun wants to read a string with spaces from the following which is suitable
(a) cin>>
(b) cin.getline(str,80)
(c) str=getc(stdin)
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) cin.getline(str,80)

Question 12.
State whether the following statement is true or false. The'<<‘ insertion operator stops reading a string when it encounters a space.
Answer:
True.

Question 13.
The process of dividing big programs into small programs are called____.
Answer:
Modularization.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 14.
The big programs are divided into smaller programs. This smaller programs are called_____.
Answer:
Functions.

Question 15.
The execution of the program begins at____function.
Answer:
main function.

Question 16.
One of the following is not involved in the creation and usage of a user defined function
(a) Define a function
(b) Declare a function
(c) invoke a function
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 17.
The default data type returned by a function is_____.
(a) float
(b) double
(c) int
(d) char
Answer:
(c) int

Question 18.
After the execution of a function, it is returned back to the main function by executing____keyword.
Answer:
return.

Question 19.
Supplying data to a function from the called function by using______.
Answer:
parameters (arguments).

Question 20.
_____keyword is used to give a value back to the called function.
Answer:
return.

Question 21.
____key word is used to specify a function returns nothing.
Answer:
void

Question 22.
One of the following is not necessary in the function declaration. What is it?
(a) name of the function
(b) return type
(c) number and type of arguments
(d) name of the parameters
Answer:
(d) name of the parameters.

Question 23.
A function declaration is also called_____.
Answer:
prototype.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 24.
Considerthe following declaration
int sum(int a , int b)
{
return a+b;
}
From the following which is the valid function call.
(a) n=sum(10)
(b) n=sum(10, 20)
(c) n=sum(10, 20, 30)
(d) n=sum()
Answer:
(b) n=sum(10, 20)

Question 25.
The ability to access a variable or a function from some where in a program is called_____.
Answer:
scope.

Question 26.
A variable ora function declared within a function is have_____scope.
Answer:
local.

Question 27.
A variable or a function declared out side of all the functions is have_____scope.
Answer:
global.

Question 28.
State True/False

  1. A local variable exist till the end of the program
  2. A global variable destroyed when the sub function terminates

Answer:

  1. False
  2. False

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 29.
consider the following declaration
int x;
int main()
{

}
Here x is a____variable.
Answer:
global.

Question 30.
consider the following declaration
int main()
{
int x;

}
Here x is a_____variable.
Answer:
local.

Question 31.
______parameter is used when the function call does not supply a value for parameters.
Answer:
default.

Question 32.
Consider the following function declaration with optional (default) arguments and state legal or illegal and give the reasons

  1. int sum(int x=10, int y, int z)
  2. int sum(int x=10, int y=20, int z)
  3. int sum(int x=10, int y=20, int z=30)
  4. int sum(int x, int y=20, int z)
  5. int sum(int x, int y=20, int z=30)
  6. int sum(int x, int y, int z=30)
  7. int sum(int x=10, int y, int z=30)

Answer:
There is a rule to make an argument as default argument,i.e., to set an argument with a value that must be in the order from right to left. All the arguments in the right side of an argument must be set first to make an argument as a default argument.

  1. illegal, because y and z are not have values
  2. illegal, because z has no value
  3. legal
  4. illegal, because z has no value
  5. legal
  6. legal
  7. illegal, because x has a value but y has no value.

Question 33.
The parameter used to call a function is called_____.
Answer:
actual parameter.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 34.
The parameters appear in a function definition are_____.
Answer:
formal parameters.

Question 35.
After the distribution of answer scripts, the teacher gives the Photostat copy of the mark list to the students to check the marks. If the students make any change that do not affect the original mark list. There is a similar situation to pass the arguments to a function. What is this method?
(a) call by value
(b) call by reference
(c) call by address
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) call by value

Question 36.
Your class teacher gives you the original mark list to check the mark. If you make any change it will affect the original mark list. There is a similar situation to pass the arguments to a function. What is this method?
(a) call by value
(b) call by reference
(c) call by function
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) call by reference

Question 37.
Consider the following function declaration
int sum(int a, int b)
{
Body
}
Here the arguments are passed by______.
Answer:
call by value method.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 38.
Consider the following function declaration
int sum(int &a, int &b)
{
Body
}
Here the arguments are passed by______.
Answer:
call by reference method.

Qn. 39
A function calls it self is known as______
Answer:
recursive function.

Question 40.
Varun wants to copy a string by using strcpy() function. From the following which header file is used for this?
(a) cstdio
(b) cmath
(c) cstring
(d) cctype
Answer:
(c) cstring

Question 41.
____is a named group of statements to perform a job /task and returns a value.
Answer:
Function.

Question 42.
To use the function setw(), from the following which header file is used.
Answer:
iomanip.h

Question 43.
In his C++ program Ajith wants to accept a lengthy text of more than one line. Which function in C++ can be used in this situation.
Answer:
gets() function can be used to accept a lengthy text.

Question 44.
Choose the C++ function which can print a string.
(a) getche()
(b) putchar()
(c) getline()
(d) puts()
Answer:
(d) puts()

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 45.
Which of the following is a console function?
(a) getline()
(b) write()
(c) put()
(d) getchar()
Answer:
(d) getchar()

Question 46.
Pick the odd one out and give reason.
(a) abs()
(b) strlen()
(c) strcmp()
(d) strcpy()
Answer:
(a) abs() – it is a mathematical function. All others are string functions.

Question 47.
Consider the following C++ statement and answer the following question:
char Word[10]=”GOOD DAY”;
Identify the correct output statement to display the string
(a) write (word);
(b) cout.write(word);
(c) cout (word);
(d) cout.write (word, 10);
Answer:
(d) cout.write(wond, 10);

Question 48.
When the number -7 is given as the argument of a predefined function in C++, it returns the value 7. Identify the function.
Answer:
abs(): This function returns the absolute value.

Question 49.
Pick out the correct statement for prototype declaration from the following and also explain the various information it contains.
(a) product (int a, int b);
(b) int product (a,b);
(c) int product (int, int);
(d) product (int, int);
Answer:
(c) int product(int, int);
This prototype specifies the return type, name of function, number, and type of arguments.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 50.
One among the following function prototypes is wrongly written. Identify it. Also given reason.
(a) float test (float);
(b) float test (float, int);
(c) test (float);
(d) int test (int);
Answer:
(c) test(float);
Here the prototype contains no return type.

Question 51.
A user defined function definition is given below. Choose the most appropriate function call statement from the options.
float calc(int x, float y)
{
return (x+y) / 2.0;
}
(a) calc (2, 4)
(b) calc (2.5, 4)
(c) calc (2.5, 4.5)
(d) calc (2, 4.5)
Answer:
(d) calc(2, 4.5);

Question 52.
Which of the following statements are FALSE about a local function?
(a) Declared inside a function
(b) Accessible only within the function it is declared
(c) Accessible from anywhere in the program
(d) Declared outside all other functions
Answer:
c and d are false to a local function.

Plus Two Computer Application Functions Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In a C++ program, you forgot to include the header file iostream.h. What are the possible errors occur in that Program? Explain ?
Answer:
Proto type error. To use cin and cout the header file iostream is a must.

Question 2.
Pick the odd one out from the following and give reason.

  • gets()
  • getline()
  • getch()
  • getchar()

Answer:
getline() – It is a stream function where as the others are console functions.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 3.
Consider the following code snippet.
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int n;
cout<<“Enter a number”; cin>>n;
cout<<‘The number is “<<n;
}
Write down the names of the header files that must be included in this program
Answer:
Here cin and cout are used so the header file iostream must be included.

Question 4.
How does C++ support modularity in programming
Answer:
The process of converting big programs into smaller programs is known as modularisation. This small programs are called modules or sub programs or functions. C++ supports modularity in programming called functions.

Question 5.
The following assignment statement will generate a compilation error.
char str[20]; str=”Computer”
Write a correct C++ statement to perform the same task
Answer:
char str[20] = “Computer”;

OR

char str[20];
strcpy(str,”Computer”); (The header file should be included).

Question 6.
float area(const float pi=3.1415, const float r)
{
r=10;
return pi*r;
}
Is there any problem? If yes what is it?
Answer:
There is an error. The error is , Y is a constant T must be initialised and cannot be changed during execution.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 7.
What are the jobs of a return statement in a program.
Answer:
In the case of a sub function a return statement helps to terminate the sub function and return back to the main function or called function. But in the case of a main function it terminates the program.

Question 8.
Match the following

(a) strcmp()(1) cctype
(b) tolower()(2) cstring
(c) sqrt()(3) cstdlib
(d) abort ()(4) cmath

Answer:
(a) 2
(b) 1
(c) 4
(d) 3

Question 9.
How to invoke a function in C++ program.
Answer:
A function can be called or invoked by providing the name of the function followed by the arguments in parenthesis Eg. sum(m,n);

Question 10.
Briefly explain constant arguments Constant arguments.
Answer:
By using the key word const we can make argument (parameter) of a function as a constant argument.
The value of the const argument cannot be modified within the function.

Question 11.
void initialise()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 1

  1. Identify the error in the, above code and explain its reasons.
  2. Correct the errors.

Answer:

  1. K is a local variable in the function initialize() – It is not accessible in main()
  2. Making the variable K as global we can correct the error.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 12.
List down the advantages of modular programming.
Answer:
Merits of modular programming

  • It reduces the size of the program
  • Less chance of error occurrence
  • Reduces programming complexity
  • Improves reusability

Question 13.
Some statements are given below. Analyse these statements and predict the output:
char str1 (15], str2[15];
str1[15]=” DATA”;
str2[15]=” STORAGE”;
strcat (str2, str1);
cout<<str2;
Answer:
The output is STORAGE DATA. The strings str2 and str1 are concatenated.

Question 14.
If char name [ ] = “Rajeev Kumar”; then what will be output of the following statement? cout<<strlen(name);
Answer:
The length(number of characters) is 12 including space.

Question 15.
Choose the value of ‘n’ after executing the following statements in C++.
char s1[ ]=”KIRAN”; char s2[ ]=”kiran”;
int n = strcmp (s1,s2);
cout<<n;
(a) 0
(b) >0
(c) <0
(d) None of these
Answer:
(c) <0. Here string 2, i.e. s2 is greaterthan string1 i.e. s1.
strcmp()- It is used to compare two strings and returns an integer.
Syntax: strcmp(string1 ,string2)

  • if it is 0 both strings are equal.
  • if it is greater than 0(i.e. +ve) string1 is greater than string2
  • if it is less than 0(i.e. -ve) string2 is greater than string1

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 16.
C++ has a built-in function with which we get the result of 42.

  1. Identify the name of the function.
  2. Identify the header file for the above function.

Answer:

  1. pow(4, 2);
  2. The header file used is cmath.

Question 17.
Consider the following C++ statements and predict the output.
int p=isalpha(‘5’);
cout<<p;
Answer:
0.
isalpha() – To check whether a character is an alphabet or not. If the character is an alphabet it returns a value 1 otherwise it returns 0.

Question 18.
Predict the output of the following C++ statements:

  1. cout<<toupper(‘a’);
  2. cout<<(char) toupper(‘a’);

Answer:

  1. It prints 65
  2. It prints A

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 19.
Differentiate formal arguments and actual arguments.
Answer:
The parameter used to call a function is called actual parameter. The parameters appear in a function definition are formal parameters.

Plus Two Computer Application Functions Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Suresh wants to print his name and native place using a C++ program. The program should accept name and native place first
Name is: Suresh Kumar
Address is: Alappuzha
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 2

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 2.
“Programming is Fun”. Write a C++ program to read a string like this in lowercase and print it in UPPER CASE. Without using toupper() library function.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 3
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 4

Question 3.
An assignment, Kumar has written a C++ program which reads a line of text and print the number of vowels in it. What will be his program code?
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cctype>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 5

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 4.
Write a program to display the following output
A
BB
CCC
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 6

Question 5.
Distinguish getchar and gets.
Answer:
getchar is a character function but gets is a string function. The header file cstdio must be included. It reads a character from the keyboard.
Eg.
char ch;
ch=getchar();
cout<<ch;
gets is used to read a string from the key board. It reads the characters upto enter key. The header file
cstdio must be included.
char str[80];
cout<<” Enter a string”;
gets(str);

Question 6.
Write a program to check whether a string is palindrome or not. (A string is said to be palindrome if it is the same as the string constituted by reversing the characters of the original string. Eg. “MALAYALAM”, “MADAM”, “ARORA”, “DAD”, etc.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 7

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 7.
Explain multi character function.
Answer:
getline() and write() functions are multi character functions.
1. getline():
It reads a line of text that ends with a newline character. It reads white spaces also.
Eg.
char line[80];
cin.getline(line,80);

2. write():
It is used to display a string.
Eg.
charline[80];
dn.getline(line, 80);
cout.write(line, 80);

Question 8.
Distinguish between get() and put() functions.
Answer:
1. get() function:
get() is an input function. It is used to read a single character and it does not ignore the white spaces and newline character.
Syntax is cin.get(variable);
Eg. char ch;
cin.get(ch);

2. put() function:
put() is an output function. It is used to print a character.
Syntax is cout.put(variable);
Eg. char ch;
cin.get(ch);
cout.put(ch);

Question 9.
Write a program to read a string and print the number of consonents
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cctype>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 8

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 10.
Write a program to read a string and print the num¬ber of spaces.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 9
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 10

Question 11.
Write a program to count the number of words in a sentence
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 11

Question 12.
Write a program to input a string and display its reversed string using console I / O functions only. For example if the input is “AND” the output should be “DNA”.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 12

Question 13.
Write a program to input a word(say COMPUTER) and create a triangle as follows.
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 13
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstring>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 14

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 14.
Write a program to input a line of text and display the first characters of each word. Use only console I /O functions. For example, if the input is “Save Water, Save Nature”, the output should be “SWSN”.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 15

Question 15.
Consider the following code snippet
char ch;
cout<< “Enter an alphabet”; cin>>ch;
cout<<toupper(ch);
What is the output of the above code? Give a sample output. If the above code is used in a computer that has no cctype file, how will you modify the code to get the same output?
Answer:
It reads a character and convert it into uppercase.
Eg:
Enter an alphabet: a
The output is A.
If a computer has no cctype header file the code is as follows.
char ch;
cout<< “Enter an alphabet”; cin>>ch;
if (ch>=97 && ch<<122)
cout<

Question 16.
Read the following program
# include<iostream.h>
int main()
{
cout<<sum(2, 3);
}
int sum(int x, int y)
{return (x + y);}
On compilation on the program, an error will be dis-played. Identify and explain the reason. How can you rectify the problem
Answer:
The compilation of the program starts from the first line and next line and so on( i.e. line by line). While compiling the line cout<<sum(2, 3); The compiler does not understand the word sum(2, 3) because it is not declared yet hence the error prototype required. To rectify this problem there are two methods
First method
Give the function definition just before the main function as follows.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int sum(int x, int y)
{return (x+y);}
int main()
{
cout<<sum(2, 3);
}

Second Method
Give the function declaration(prototype only) in the main function as follows.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
{
int sum(int, int);
cout<<sum(2, 3);
}
int sum(int x, int y)
{return (x+y);}

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 17.
Considering the following function definition;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 16
The expected, desired output is 5! = 120
What will be the actual output of the program? It is not the same as above, why? What modification are required in the program to get the desired output.
Answer:
The output is 0! = 120
Because the address of variable ‘a’ is given to the variable ‘n’ of the function fact(call by reference method). So the function changes its value (i.e. n- -) to 0. Hence the result.

To get the desired result call the function as call by value method in this method the copy of the value of the variable ‘a’ is given to the function. So the actual value of ‘a’ will not changed. So instead of int fact(int &n) just write int fact(int n), i.e., no need of & symbol.

Question 18.
A function is defined as follows
int sum (int a, int b=2)
{return (a+b);}
Check whether each of the following function calls is correct or wrong, Justify your answer

  1. cout<<sum(2, 3);
  2. cout<<sum( 2);
  3. cout<<sum();

Answer:
Here the function is declared with one optional argument. So the function call with minimum one argument is compulsory.

  1. 0 It is valid. Here a becomes 2 and b becomes 3.
  2. It is also valid . Here a becomes 2 and b takes the default value 2.
  3. It is not a valid call. One argument is compulsory.

Question 19.
How do two functions exchange data between them? Compare the two methods of data transfer from calling function to called function.
Answer:
There are two methods they are call by value and call by reference
1. call by value:
In call by value method, a copy of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will not affect the original value.

2. call by reference:
In call by reference method, the reference of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will affect the original value.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 20.
Write down the operation performed by the following statements

  1. int l=strten(“Computer Program”);
  2. charch [] = tolower(“My School”);
  3. cout<<(strcmp(“High”, “Low”)>0 ?

toupper(“High”):tolower(“Low”));
Answer:

  1. The built in function strlen find the length of the string i.e. 16 and assigns it to the variable I.
  2. This is an error because tolower is a character function.
  3. This is also an error because tolower and toupper are character functions.

Question 21.
A line of given length with a particular character is to be displayed. For example, ********** is a line with ten asterisks (*). Define a function to achieve this output
Answer:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
void line (char ch, int n)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 17

Question 22.
Read the following function
int fib(int n)
{
if (n<3)
return 1;
else
return (fib(n-1) + fib(n-2));
}

  1. What is the speciality of this function
  2. How does it work ?
  3. What will be the output of the following code?

for (int i=1; i<5; i++)
cout<<fib(i)<<‘\t’;
Answer:
1. This function is a recursive function. That means the function calls itself.

2. It works as follows
if i = 1, The function fib calls with value 1. i.e. fib(1) returns 1
if i = 2, The function fib calls with value 2. i.e. fib(2) returns 1
if i = 3, The function fib calls with value 3. i.e. fib(3) returns fib(2) + fib(1) i.e. it calls the function again. So the result is 1 + 1 = 2
if i = 4, The function fib calls with value 4. i.e. fib(4) returns fib(3) + fib(2) i.e. it calls the function again. So the result is 2 + 1 = 3

3. The output will be as follows
1 1 2 3.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 23.
Explain scope rules of functions and variables in a C++ program
Answer:
1. Local variable or function:
A variable or function declared inside a function is called local variable or function. This cannot be accessed by the outside of the function.
Eg.
main()
{
int k;//local variable ,
cout<<sum(a,b); // local function
}

2. Global variable or function:
A variable or function declared out side of a function is called global variable or function. This can be accessed by any statements.
Eg.
int k; // global variable
int sum(inta, int b); //global function
main()
{
}

Question 24.
Briefly explain default arguments.
Answer:
A default value can be set for a parameter(argument) of a function. When the user does not give a value the function will take the default value. An important thing remember is an argument cannot have a default value unless all arguments on its right side must have default value.

Functions with valid default arguments are given below

  • float area(int x, int y, int z=30);
  • float area(int x, int y=20, int z=30);
  • float area(int x=10, int y=20, int z=30);

Functions with invalid default arguments are given below

  • float area(int x=10, int y, int z);
  • float area(intx, inty=20, int z);
  • float area(int x=10, int y=20, int z);

Question 25.
Write a program to read a character and check whether it is alphabet or not. If it is an alphabet check whether it is upper case or lower case?
Answer:
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 18

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 26.
Write a program to read 2 strings and join them
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 19

Question 27.
Write a program to read 2 strings and compare it.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cstring>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 20

Question 28.
Write a program to read a string and display the number of alphabets and digits and special characters.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 21
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 22

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 29.
A. void change(int&);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 23
B. void change(int);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 24

  1. Predict the output of both programs.
  2. Justify your predictions.

Answer:
1. A. Output
value = 40
B. output
value = 0

2. In the first case (A) the argument x is passed by reference method. So the changes made in the function reflects in main()

In the second case (B) the argument x is passed by value method. So the changes made in the function will not reflect in main().

Question 30.
Write a program to read 2 strings and join them using string function
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstring>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 25

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 31.
Differentiate the outputs of the folloiwng C++ statements and also give reason

  1. cout< <strcmp(“world”, “WORLD”);
  2. cout<<strcmpi(“world”, “WORLD”);

Answer:

  1. >0 Here first string “world” is greater than “WORLD”.
  2. It prints 0. Because strcmpi is same as strcmp() but it is not case sensitive. That means uppercase and lowercase are treated as same.

Question 32.
Match the following.

1. strcmp()a. To combine two strings
2. strcpy ()b. To get 5 from 25
3. strcat ()c. To get 10 from -10
4. sqrt ()d. To change a to A
5. abs()e. To compare two strings
6. toupper()f. To copy one string another

Answer:
1-e, 2-f, 3-a, 4-b, 5-c, 6-d.

Question 33.
Write a C++ program to find the sum of first ‘N’ natural numbers using a user defined function.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int sum(int n)
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 26

Question 34.
Write the need for function prototype in a C++ program.
Answer:
When the function is defined after the main function then there is an error called “function should have a prototype”. This is because of the function is defined after the main function. To resolve this a prototype should be declared inside the main function.

Question 35.
Write suitable function prototype after reading the following cases.

  • Case I : The function Volume() takes two arguments, one is float the other is int and it returns its volume.
  • Case II : A function Big() has no arguments and no return type.
  • Case III: A function PrintO takes two floating point type arguments and nothing is returned.

Answer:

  • Case I: float Volume(float,int);
  • Case II: void BigO; or void Big(void);
  • Case III : void Print(float,float) or void Print(double,double);

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 36.
Find the error in the following C++ program and rectify it.
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int main ()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 27
Answer:
Error 1: Here function prototype is missing.
Error 2: no need for variable z.
Error 3: no need of the statement z = x*y;
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int multi(int, int);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 28

Question 37.
Consider the following function definition.
int add (int a, int b=2, int c=5)
{
int s = a + b + c;
cout<<“Sum is :”<<s;
}
Predict the output of the above code forthe following function calls:

  1. add (5, 8, 10);
  2. add (5, 8);
  3. add (5);

Answer:

  1. add(5, 8, 10). Here a = 5, b = 8 and c = 10. Then It prints 23(5 + 8 + 10)
  2. add(5, 8). Here a = 5, b = 8 and no value for c then c will take the default value 5. Hence it prints 18(5 + 8 + 5(default value for c)).
  3. add(5). Here a = 5 and no values for b and c, then b and c will take the default values 2 and 5 respectively. Hence it prints 12(5 + 2 + 5(default values for b and c)).

Question 38.
Consider the following C++ program, predict the output and justify it.
#include<iostream>
using namespace std;
intsqr(int&);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 29
Answer:
The output are 25 and 6. Here the function uses call by reference method. The function call sqr(a) passes the original value to the function sqr. The function changes the value of b(here a and b are same) to 6. That means a also becomes 6.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 39.
Differentiate local variable and global variable in C++ program.
Answer:
1. Local scope:
A variable declared inside a block can be used only in the block. It cannot be used any other block.
Eg: int sum(int n1,int n2)
{
int s;
s=n1+n2;
return(s);
}
Here the variable s is declared inside the function sum and has local scope;

2. Global scope:
A variable declared outside of all blocks can be used anywhere in the program.
Eg:
int s;
intsum(int n1,int n2)
{
s=n1+n2;
return(s);
}
Here the variable s is declared out side of all functions and we can use variable s any where in the program.

Question 40.
Consider the following C++ code fragment and identify the local function and global function. Also justify your selection.
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 30
Answer:
Here the function print() is declared inside a function hence it is a local function but the function sum() is declared outside of all functions hence it is called global function.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 41.
Read the following C++ program and identify the error and give reason.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
void disp(int);
int main()
int x=10; disp (x); return 0;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 31
Answer:
The variable ‘x’ will not be printed because it is declared in the main() function. That is x is a local variable.

Plus Two Computer Application Functions Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What will be the output of the following code if the userenterthe value “GOOD MORNING”

  1. char String [80];
    gets(string);
    cout<<string;
  2. char String [80]; cin>>string;
    cout<<string;
  3. char ch;
    ch=getchar();
    cout<<ch;
  4. char String [80];
    cin.getline(string,9);
    cout<<string;

Answer:

  1. GOOD MORNING
  2. GOOD
  3. G
  4. GOOD MORN

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 2.
Read a string and print the number of vowels.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
# include<cctype>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 32

Question 3.
Describe in detail about the unformatted console i/o functions.
Answer:

  1. Single character functions: This function is used to read or print a character at a time.
    • getchar(): It reads a character from the keyboard and store it in a character variable.
      Eg. char ch;
      ch=getchar();
    • putchar(): This function is used to print a character on the screen.
      Eg. char ch;
      ch=getcharO;
      putchar(ch);
  2. String functions: This function is used to read or print a string.
    • gets(): This function is used to read a string from the keyboard and store it in a character variable.
      Eg. char str[80];
      gets(str);
    • puts(): This function is used to display a string on the screen.
      Eg. char str[80];
      gets(str);
      puts(str);

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 4.
Write a program to input a string and find the number of uppercase letters, lowercase letters, digits, special characters, and white spaces.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 33
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 34

Question 5.
Write a program to input a string and replace all lowercase vowels by the corresponding uppercase letters.
Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 35
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 36

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 6.
A list of C++ built in functions are given. Classify them based on the usage and prepare a table with proper group names.

  • strcmp()
  • sin()
  • getch()
  • isalpha()
  • pow()
  • puts()
  • strcat()
  • tolower()
  • getchar()
  • isalnum()
  • sqrt()
  • exp()
  • write()

Answer:
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 37

Question 7.
The factorial of a number, say N is the product of first N natural numbers. Thus, factorial of 5 can be obtained by taking the product of 5 and factorial of 4. Similarly factorial of 4 be found out by taking the product of 4 and factorial of 3. At last the factorial of 1 is 1 itself. Which technique is applicable to find the factorial of a number in this fashion? Write a C++ function to implement this technique. Also explain the working of the function by giving the number 5 as input.
Answer:
A function calls itself is known as recursion.
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int fac(int);
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 38
The working of this program is as follows. If the value of n is 5 then it calls the function as fac(5). The function returns value 5*fac(4). That means this function calls the function again and returns 5*4*fac(3). This process continues until the value n=1. So the result is 5*4*3*2*1 = 120.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 8.
Read the following program
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
int a = 0;
int main ()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 39
Write down the value displayed by the output of the above program with suitable explanation. What are the inferences drawn regarding the scope of variables?
Answer:
The output is 061.
1. Global variable: A variable declared out side of all functions it is known as global variable.

2. Local variable: A variable declared inside of a function it is known as local variable.

If a variable declared inside a function(main or other) with the same name of a global variable. The function uses the value of local variable and does not use the value of the global variable.

Here int a=0 is a global variable. In the main function the global variable ‘a’ is used. There is no local vari-able so the value of ‘a’, 0 is displayed. The statement ‘a++’ makes the value of ‘a’ is 1. It calls the function showval with argument ‘a=1’.

The argument ‘x’ will get this value i.e. ‘x=T. But in the function showval there is a local variable ‘a’ its value is 5 is used. So this function returns 6 and it will be displayed. After this the value 1 of the global variable ‘a’ will be displayed. Hence the result 061.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 9.
The following are function calling statements. Some of them will be executed, while some other generate compilation error. Write down your opinion on each of them with proper justification
Answer:

  1. char ch=getch();
  2. sqrt(25);
  3. strcat (“Computer”, “Program”);
  4. double num = pow(2, 3, 5)
  5. put char(getchar());

Answer:

  1. getch get a character from the console(key board) but does not echo to the screen. So we can’t read a character from the console.
  2. It returns the square root of 25.
  3. It concatenates Program to computer, i.e. we will get a string “computer program”
  4. The function pow should contains only two arguments. But here it contains 3 arguments so it is an error. We can write this function as follows Double num = pow(pow(2, 3, 5)
  5. It reads a character from the console and display it on the screen.

Question 10.
Short notes about character functions and string functions
Answer:
a. Character functions:
1. isalnum(): It is used to check whether a character is alphabet or digit. It returns a non zero value if it is an alphabet or digit otherwise it returns zero.

2. isalpha(): It is used to check whether a character is alphabet or not. It returns a non zero value if it is an alphabet otherwise it returns zero.

3. isdigit(): It is used to check whether a character is digit or not. It returns a non zero value if it is digit otherwise it returns zero.

4. islower(): It is used to check whether a character is lower case alphabet or not. It returns a non zero value if it is a lower case alphabet otherwise it returns zero.

5. isupper(): It is used to check whether a character is upper case alphabet or not. It returns a non zero value if it is an upper case alphabet otherwise it returns zero.

6. tolower(): It is used to convert the alphabet into lowercase.

7. toupper(): It is used to convert the alphabet into upper case.

b. String functions:
1. strcpy(): This function is used to copy one string into another.

2. strcat(): This function is used to concatenate(join) second string into first string.

3. strlen(): This function is used to find the length of a string.

4. strcmp(): This function is used to compare 2 strings. If the first string is less than second string then it returns a negative value. If the first string is equal to the second string then it returns a value zero and if the first string is greater than the second string then it returns a positive value.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 11.
Write a program to perform the following operations on a string

  1. Length of a string
  2. Search a character
  3. Display the string

Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cstdio>
using namespace std;
void len()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 40
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 41
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 42
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 43

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 12.
Write functions to perform the following operations.

  1. sqrt()
  2. power of 2 numbers
  3. sin
  4. cos

Answer:
# include<iostream>
# include<cmath>
using namespace std;
void sqroot()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 44
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 45
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 46

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions

Question 13.
Read the following C++ programs and answer the questions:
Case I
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 47

Case II
# include<iostream>
using namespace std;
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Functions - 48

  1. Identify the type of function call in each case.
  2. How do they differ?

Answer:

  1. In case I the method used is Call by value and in Case II is Call by reference.
  2. There are two methods they are call by value and call by reference

a. call by value:
In call by value method, a copy of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will not affect the original value.

b. call by reference:
In call by reference method, the reference of the actual parameters are passed to the formal parameters. If the function makes any change it will affect the original value.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Students can Download Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Plus One Botany Morphology of Flowering Plants One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which plant part is modified into a pitcher in pitcher plants?
(a) stem
(b) leaf
(c) flower
(d) root
Answer:
(b) leaf

Question 2.
Marginal placentation is generally found in the family
(a) Solanaceae
(b) Fabaceae
(c) Liliaceae
(d) Cucurbitaceae
Answer:
(b) Fabaceae

Question 3.
Nonendospermic seeds are found in
(a) pea
(b) groundnut
(c) beans
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 4.
Monocotyledonous seed possess a cotyledon which is represented by
(a) teg men
(b) endosperm
(c) scutellum
(d) aleurone
Answer:
(c) scutellum

Question 5.
Which floral family has (9) + 1 arrangement of anthers in the andoecium
(a) Malvaceae
(b) Fabaceae
(c) Solanaceae
(d) Liliaceae
Answer:
(b) Fabaceae

Question 6.
Based on the relationship, fill in the blanks.

  1. Prop root: Support
    Pneumatophore: ……….
  2. Transpiration: Stomata
    Guttation: ……….

Answer:

  1. breathing /respiration
  2. Hydathode

Question 7.
The arrangement of petals in the flower is known as
Answer:
Aestivation

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 8.
When your teacher asked to write a few examples for root modifications, a student wrote Potato. Is it correct? Why ?
Answer:
No. Stem modification

Question 9.
Write the name of the family which has the given floral formula.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img1
Answer:
Solanaceae

Question 10.
Observe the relationship between first two words and fill up the suitable word in the next place.

  1. Shoot – plumule: Root …………..
  2. Outer integument – testa: inner integnment ……….

Answer:

  1. Radicle
  2. tegmen

Question 11.
Observe the first pair in a and b and then complete the second pair.

  1. gourd – Tendril
    citrus – …………
  2. Brinjal – Hypogynous flower
    Rose – …………..

Answer:

  1. Thom
  2. Epigynous

Question 12.
Identify the family having the given floral formula.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img2
Answer:
Papilionaceae

Question 13.
“Stilt roots are adventitious and give mechanical support’’. How does prop root help the plant?
Answer:
Support the horizontal branches.

Question 14.
“Some flowers are called perigynous”. What do you mean by it?
Answer:
Ovary half inferior or half superior.

Question 15.
From the following terms relating a flower, write its floral formula.
Bisexual; sepals 5 and united petal 5 and united; stamens 5 and epipetalous, carpels 2 and Syncarpous, superior..
Answer:
Solanaceae

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 16.
Based on morphology pick up the odd one and state reason for your selection (Carrot, Beetroot, Potato, Sweetpotato, radish).
Answer:
Potato- because it is a stem modifications.

Question 17.
Phyllotaxy is the arrangement of leaves on the branch. Identify the order of plants showing Alternate, opposite and Whorled phyllotaxy in the following.
(a) China rose, Calotropis, Nerium
(b) Nerium, China rose, Caltropis
(c) Nerium, Caltropis, China rose
(d) China rose, Nerium, Caltropis
Answer:
(a) China rose, Calotropis, Nerium

Plus One Botany Morphology of Flowering Plants Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Identify the types of aestivation in the following diagrams. Justify your answer.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img3
Answer:

  • Valvate aestivation – Petals touching each other.
  • Imbricate aestivation – petals arranged as one completely in, one completely out & others in and out.

Question 2.
“Potato is a stem and sweet potato is a root”. Justify the statement on the basis of external features only.
Answer:
Potato has distinct nodes and internodes whereas sweet potato does not have nodes and internodes. Potato tuber has scale leaves while sweet potato does not have scale leaves.

Question 3.
Identify the given family. Write the floral formula, mention the economic importance.

  1. Bisexual, actinomorphic
  2. Perianth six
  3. Valvate aestivation
  4. Ovary superior, Prilocular with many ovules.

Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img4

Question 4.
Note the difference between the placenta and thalamus.
Answer:

  • Placenta – Region with which ovules are attached to ovary.
  • Thalamus – Region where floral parts are attached

Question 5.
Based on the relationship, fill in the blanks.

  1. Prop root: Support
    Pneumatophore: …………
  2. Transpiration: Stomata
    Guttation: …………….

Answer:

  1. Breathing
  2. Hydathode

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 6.

  1. Identify the type of placentation given below.
  2. Differentiate between apocarpous and syncarpous condition

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img5
Answer:

  1. marginal, axile, parietal, freecentral,basal
  2. apocarpous – free carpels.
    Syncarpous – fused carpels

Question 7.
In early morning, on the margins of leaves water drops are seen. Why does it occur?
Answer:
Guttation – The lose of water in the form of water droplets through water stomata seen on the margin on the leaves.

Question 8.
You are provided with the rhizome of a ginger plant.

  1. Name the part of the plant modified to form this structure.
  2. Write any three differentiating characters.

Answer:

  1. Stem
  2. Presence of Node, internode, terminal bud, axillary buds & scale leaves.

Question 9.
The following diagrams show different types of placentation.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img6

  1. Name the type of placentations.
  2. write one example for each placentation.

Answer:

  1. Marginal, Basal
  2. Pea & Sunflower

Question 10.
L.S of maize seed is given below.Observe the diagram and label the parts.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img7
Answer:

  1. Endosperm
  2. Scutellum
  3. Coleoptile
  4. Plumule

Question 11.
The floral formula of a flower is
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img8

  1. Identify the family.
  2. Write the characters of androecium and gynoecium of this family.

Answer:

  1. Solanaceae
  2. Androecium – Five stamens epipetalous
    Gynoecium – bicarpellary, syncarpous, superior ovary.

Question 12.
Expand the floral formula
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img9
Answer:
zygomorphic bisexual pentamerous gamosepalous papilionaceous corolla diadelphous – Androecium. Gynoecium – superior.

Question 13.
Observe the following diagram and answer to the following Questions.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img10

  1. Name the part of the plant modified in ‘A’ and ‘B’.
  2. Mention their functions.

Answer:

  1. A – Taproot B – Adventitious root
  2. A – Storage B – Respiration

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 14.
The rhizome of ginger is found underground. But it is not root. Give reason.
Answer:
It has nodes, internodes, scale, leaves, axillary bud, terminal bud, adventitious root etc.

Question 15.
How is pinnately compound leaf different from palmately compound leaf?
Answer:
When a number of leaflets are present on either sides of a common axis, rachis it is pinnately compound leaf. Rachis represents the midrib of leaf. Eg. Neem When the leaflets are attached at a common point like fingers on palm it is palmately compound leaf. Eg. Bombax or silk cotton.

Question 16.
Identify the phyllotaxy of A and B
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img11
Answer:
(a) Alternate
(b) Oppositemedicinal.

Question 17.
Roots obtain oxygen from air in the soil for respiration. In the absence or deficiency of 02, root growth is restricted or completely stopped. How do the plants growing in marshlands or swamps obtain their 02 required for root respiration?
Answer:
In marshy area, the plants get 02 through special roots called pneumatophores or respiratory roots.Such roots are negatively geotropic.

Question 18.
During a feild trip to the coastal areas of Kochi, your team saw many trees growing in swampy areas, when thourdughly observed they found many roots growing upwards above the soil level.

  1. In your opinion what kind of roots were seen in that trees?
  2. How do these roots help the trees?

Answer:

  1. Pneumatophore
  2. Gaseous exchange

Question 19.
Rhizome of ginger is like the roots of other plants that grows underground. Despite this fact ginger is a stem and not a root. Justify.
Answer:
Because it possess nodes and internodes, buds, scale leaf, and adventitious roots. Hence these are stem characters.

Question 20.
Tendrils are found in the following plants. Identify whether they are stem tendrils or leaf tendrils,
a. Cucumber
b. Peas
c. Pumpkins
d. Watermelons
Answer:
a,c,d – stem tendril b – leaf tendril

Question 21.
You have heard about several insectivorous plants that feed on insects. Nepenthes or the pitcher plant is one such example, which usually grows in shallow water or in marshlands. What part of the plant is modified into a pitcher1? How does this modification help the plant for food even though it can photosynthesize like any other green plant?
Answer:
Lamina, Plant get additional nutrition (nitrogen) from the digested insect body.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 22.
Mangrove plants have negatively geotropic roots

  1. Name the root
  2. Identify its function

Answer:

  1. Pneumatophore
  2. Gaseous exchange

Question 23.
1. Write the floral formula of the flower having following description (Bisexual, Zygomorhic, Calyx 5 gamosepalous, Corolla 5 polysepalous, vexillary aestivation, Androecium 10 (stamens 9 united and1 free), Gynoecium 1 carpel, ovary superior)
2. Identify the family of the flower
Answer:

  1. K(5)C 1 + 2 + (2) A(9) + 1G1
  2. Fabaceae

Question 24.
The following diagrams show different types of placentation.

  1. Name the types of placentations?
  2. Write one example for each placentations?

Answer:

  1. Marginal and Basal placentation
  2. Marginal – pea, Basal – sunflower

Question 25.
Dicot and monocot leaves shows differences on their leaves mostly in the arrangement of veins, explain it.
Answer:
In Dicot, the veins are repeatedly branched to form network. This is called Reticulate venation. In Monocot, the veins run parallel to one another. This is called Parallel venation.

Question 26.
What is placentation ?Give two types with example.
Answer:
It is the mode of arrangement of ovules in an Ovary

  1. Axile placentation – Arrangement of ovules in the axis of ovary having septa.
  2. Free central placentation – Arrangement of ovules in the central part of ovary without having septa.

Question 27.
Common functions of roots are absorption, fixation and conduction. Besides these, roots perform other functions. Justify this statement with two example.
Answer:
1. In addition to absorption, fixation, and conduction, roots perform mechanical support, eg -prop root and stilt root.

2. Some are Breathing roots eg:- Pneumatophore.

Question 28.
Differentiate between
Hypogynous and Epigynous
Answer:

  1. In hypogynous flower the position of Gynoecium is superior to all other floral whorls.
  2. In epigynous flower the position of Gynoecium is inferior to all other floral whorls.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 29.
A list of some plant parts are given below. Note the morphological modification in each item.

  1. Carrot
  2. Tapioca
  3. Potato
  4. Ginger

Answer:

  1. Carrot – Tap root modification
  2. Tapioca – Adventitious root modification
  3. Potato – Underground stem modification
  4. Ginger – Underground stem modification

Question 30.
Some flowers are called perigynous”. What do you mean by it?
Answer:
In such flowers ovary is half inferior that means position of ovary comes to the same level of other floral whorls lies.
Eg:- plum, rose, and peach

Question 31.
How is pinnately compound leaf different from palmately compound leaf?
Answer:
1. In pinnately compound leaf lamina divided into number of leaflets. It is due to the incisions touch the midrib Eg:- Neem.

2. In palmately compound leaf, lamina is divided into number of leaflets, they are arranged like fingers on the palm Eg:- Silk cotton

Question 32.
When your teacher asked to write a few examples for root modifications, a student wrote Potato. Is it correct? Why ?
Answer:
No, Potato is an example of underground stem modification.

Question 33.
How can you differentiate between free central and axile placentation?
Answer:
In free central placentation ovules are arranged at central axis of ovary without septa but in axile placentation ovules are arranged at central axis of ovary with septa/ cross walls.

Question 34.

  1. Name the aestivations given below
  2. Give an example for each

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img12
Answer:
1. Twisted and imbricate
Hibiscus and cassia

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 35.
Potato is a stem and sweet potato is a root”. Justify the statement on the basis of external features only.
Answer:
Potato is an underground stem. It possess adventitious bud, nodes and internodes Sweet potato is adventitious root modification. It possess root hairs and stores food.

Question 36.
The floral formula of a family is given below Give two examples for economically important plants
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img13
Answer:

  • Indigofera – dye obtained
  • Sesbania- Used as Fodder

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img14

Question 37.
The mature seeds of plants such as gram and peas possess no Endosperm. Why?
Answer:
Endosperm gets used up by the developing embryo during seed development.

Question 38.
Match the following.

Group AGroup B
A.  Aleurone layer

B.  Parthenocarpic fruit

C.  Ovule

D.  Endosperm

i.    without fertilization

ii.    Nutrition

iii.   Double fertilization

iv.  Seed

Answer:
A – iv
B – i
C – iii
D – ii

Question 39.
Mango and coconut are ‘drupe’ type of fruits. In mango fleshy mesocarp is edible.

  1. What is the edible part of coconut?
  2. What does milk of tender coconut represent?

Answer:

  1. Endosperm
  2. Liquid endosperm (free nuclear endosperm)

Question 40.
The mode of arrangements of sepals or petals in a floral bud is known as aestivation. Draw the various types of aestivation possible for a typical pentamerous flower.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img15

Question 41.
Give the technical term and examples of the flowers given here based on the position of the ovary.
Answer:
Hypogynous- hibiscus and perigynous- plum and rose.

Question 42.
Modified adventitious roots in Banyan tree and Maize plant are known in different names

  1. Which are they?
  2. Give its function

Answer:

  1. Banyan tree – Prop root, Maize plant-Stilt root
  2. Mechanical support

Question 43.
Thorns and spines are different modified structures in citrus and cactus.

  1. Which plant part is modified ?
  2. Give its function.

Answer:

  1. Thorns – stem modification, Spines – Leaf modification
  2. protective function

Question 44.
Some important family characters are given below flowers are zygomorphic, Hypogynous, monocarpellary ovary, anthers diadelphous, and papilionaceous corolla

  1. Identify the family
  2. Give 2 economically important plants

Answer:

  1. Fabaceae
  2. dye – Indigofera, fodder yielding – sesbania and Trifolium

Question 45.
Give the technichal term of the following

  1. Two leaves at each node
  2. flowers cannot be divided into two equal halves
  3. position of ovary is higher than other floral whorls
  4. carpels are fused

Answer:

  1. opposite phyllotaxy
  2. asymmetric
  3. Hypogynous flower
  4. syncarpous

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 46.
Mention the statement given below are true or false

  1. In axile placentation ovules are arranged in axis of single-chambered ovary
  2. In Imbricate aestivation floral appendages are in irregular overlapping
  3. In Alstonia phyllotaxy is whorled
  4. Floral axis has definite growth in racemose type

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. True
  4. False

Plus One Botany Morphology of Flowering Plants Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Justify the following statements on the basis of external features.

  1. Underground parts of plants are not always roots
  2. Flower is a modified shoot

Answer:
1. Underground stem get modified for different purposes like food storage, reproduction and perennation. They can be recognized from root in having nodes, internodes,scale leaves, terminal bud &axillary bud eg. Rhizome – ginger, stem tuber- potato.

2. A flower can be considered as a modified shoot because each whorl of a flower represents each node. The leaves at each node is modified to perform functions like protection, attraction and reproduction. The internodes are compressed to form a flower.

Question 2.

  1. What is meant by modification of root?
  2. What type of root is found in
    • banyan tree
    • turnip
    • mangrove tree root modification is the change in shape and structure of root for performing functions other than absorption and conduction.

Answer:

  1. It is modified for performing different functions.
    • Modification of root in banyan tree-prop roots- for mechanical support
    • Turnip-napiform modification – for food storage
    • Mangrove tree-pneumatophores – respiration

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
Some characters of a flower is given below. Bisexual, sepals 5 and united, Petals 5 and united, stamens 5 and epipetalous, carpels 2, syncarpous and superior ovary.

  1. Write its floral formula.
  2. Identify the family.
  3. List any two economically important plants belonging to this family.

Answer:
1.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img16
2. Solanaceae
3. Potato – Solanum tuberosum Tomato – Lycopersicum esculentum

Question 4.
A particular flower of a family is characterised by this type of aestivation.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img17
a) Identify the family.
b) Write the floral formula.
c) Mention two economic importance of the family.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img18

Question 5.
Observe the relationship between first two words and fill up the suitable word in the fourth place.

  1. Shoot – plumule: Root ………..
  2. Nepenthes – pitcher: Utricularia …………
  3. Outer integument – testa: inner integument …………..
  4. Ovule – seed: Ovary – …………..

Answer:

  1. Radicle
  2. Bladder
  3. Tegmen
  4. Fruit

Question 6.
Label the regions of the root tip in the given diagram.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img19
Answer:

  1. Root cap
  2. Meristematic
  3. Region of elongation
  4. Root hair region

Question 7.
The arrangements of ovules within the ovary is known as placentation.

  1. What does the term placenta refer to?
  2. Name and draw various types of placentations in the flower as seen in T.S. or V.S.

Answer:
1. Placenta It is the cushion-like structure in which ovules are arranged.
2.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img20

Question 8.
Define the following terms.

  1. Aestivation:
  2. Placentation:
  3. Actinomorphic:
  4. Zygomorphic:
  5. superior ovary:
  6. Perigynous flower:
  7. Epigynous

Answer:

  1. Aestivation: Arrangement of sepals and petals in an unopened flower bud.
  2. Placentation: The mode of arrangement of ovules within the ovary
  3. Actinomorphic: When a flower can be divided into two equal radial halves at any radial plane. Eg: Chinarose.
  4. Zygomorphic: When a flower can be cut into two equal halves only in one vertical plane. Eg: pea.
  5. Superior ovary: When gynoecium occupies superior or highest position while other parts are situated below it. Eg: Mustard.
  6. Perigynous flower: If the gynoecium is at the centre and all other, parts arise on the rim of the thalamus. Eg: Rose

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 9.
Differentiate between

  1. Racemose and cymose inflorescence.
  2. Fibrous and adventitious root
  3. Apocarpous and syncarpous ovary.

Answer:
1. Racemose:The axis or peduncle shows indefinite growth. Flowers are arranged in acropetal succession.
Cymose: the axis or peduncle shows definite growth or ends in a flower. Flowers are arranged in basipetal succession.

2. Fibrous: The primary root stops its growth and lateral roots arise from the base of the stem.
Adventitious: The roots arise from the part of the plant other than the radicle.

3. Apocarpous: When the carpels of ovary are free.
Syncarpous: When the carpels of ovary are fused.

Question 10.
Floral characters of a plant are given below: Pentamerous flowers, Polypetalous, Stamens 5, Polyandrous, Bicarpellary Syncarpous, Swollen placenta, Oblique ovary.
a) Name the Family of this plant belongs.
b) Write the floral formula of this family.
c) Give two examples with its importance.
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img21

Plus One Botany Morphology of Flowering Plants NCERT Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How is a pinnately compound leaf different from a plamately compound leaf?
Answer:
1. Pinnately Compound Leaf.
In pinnately compound leaf a number of leaflets are present on a common axis. Example, neem leaves.

2. Palmately Compound Leaf.
In palmately compound leaf number of leaflets are attached at the common point. Example, cotton leaves.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img22

Question 2.
Explain with suitable examples the different types of phyllotaxy.
Answer:
1. Phyllotaxy. Phyllotaxy is the pattern of arrangement of leaves on the stem or branch. This is usually of three types – alternate, opposite and whorled.

2. In alternate type of phyllotaxy, a single leaf arises at each node in alternate manner, as in china rose, mustard and sunflower plants.

3. In the Opposite type, a pair of leaves arise at each node and lie opposite to each other as in Calotropis and guava plants.

4. If more than two leaves arise at a node and form a whorl, it is called whorled, as in Alstonia.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img23

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 3.
What is meant by modification of root? What type of modification of root is found to the :

  1. Banyan tree
  2. Turnip
  3. Mangrove trees

Answer:
The Primary function of the root is absorption of water and minerals and giving mechanical support to the plant. Sometimes roots get modified to carry out other functions like storage of food or additional mechanical support.

1. Banyan Tree. In banyan trees long roots develop from branches and they hanging deep down to reach the ground. They are providing additional mechanical support to the huge banyan tree. This modification is called a prop root.

2. Turnip. In turnip the root is modified to store extra food.

3. Mangrove Trees. Mangrove trees are found in marshy area. The roots are modified into pneumatophore providing extra passage to allow additional oxygen to the plant.

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The obliquely growing roots that provides mechanical support to the main stem are
(a) prop root
(b) stilt root
(c) pneumatophore
(d) pillar root
Answer:
(b) stilt root

Question 2.
Lateral branches arise from the base of main stem that grows aerially at first and arch downwards in
(a) pistia
(b) mint
(c) jasmine
(d) both b & C
Answer:
(d) both b & C

Question 3.
Pulvinus is found in the leaf base of
(a) Rosaceae
(b) Leguminosae
(c) Malvaceae
(d) Solanaceae
Answer:
(b) Leguminosae

Question 4.
The appearance of more than one leaf at each node is represented by
(a) china rose
(b) sunflower
(c) Alstonia
(d) guava
Answer:
(c) Alstonia

Question 5.
Roots are significant in the exchange of gases
(a) pneumatophore
(b) stilt root
(c) pillar root
(d) assimilatory root
Answer:
(a) pneumatophore

Question 6.
The type of flower cannot be divided into two similar halves in any vertical plane through centre is
(a) actinomorphic
(b) zygomorphic
(c) asymmetric
(d) both b & c
Answer:
(c) asymmetric

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 7.
Ovary half inferior is seen in
(a) plum
(b) china rose
(c) peach
(d) both a & c
Answer:
(d) both a & c

Question 8.
Find out the papilionaceous type of corolla from the given figure.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img24
(a) A
(b) B
(c) C
(d) D
Answer:
(d) D

Question 9.
9. Flowers with bisexual, zygomorphic, diadelphous and monocarpellary superior ovary are the characteristic feature of
(a) fabaceae
(b) malvaceae
(c) solanaceae
(d) liliaceae
Answer:
(a) fabaceae

Question 10.
The type of placentation given here is
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img25
(a) axile
(b) basal
(c) marginal
(d) parietal
Answer:
(d) parietal

Question 11.
Hilum is found in
(a) embryo
(b) seed coat
(c) radicle
(d) chalaza
Answer:
(b) seed coat

Question 12.
Ashwagandha is represented by the family
(a) Fabaceae
(b) papillionaceae
(c) Solanaceae
(d) Liliaceae
Answer:
(c) Solanaceae

Question 13.
The family represented by the floral formula given below is
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img26
(a) fabaceae
(b) papillionaceae
(c) solanaceae
(d) liliaceae
Answer:
(c) solanaceae

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants

Question 14.
Negatively geotropic roots are seen in
(a) zaminkand
(b) Rhizophora
(c) maize
(d) euphorbia
Answer:
(b) Rhizophora

Question 15.
In the following picture, plant part is modified for
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 3 Morphology of Flowering Plants img27
(a) storage
(b) respiration
(c) support
(d) protection
Answer:
(a) storage

Question 16.
When the filaments of stamens are attached to the perianth, the condition is
(a) Epiphyllous
(b) epipetalous
(c) adelphous
(d) syngenesious
Answer:
(a) Epiphyllous

Question 17.
In China rose, five carpels are fused at base. This condition is called
(a) Pentacarpellary, syncarpous and pentalocular
(b) Pentacarpellary, apocarpous and pentalocular
(c) polycarpellary, syncarpous and penalocular
(d) Pentacarpellary, syncarpous and multilocular
Answer:
(a) Pentacarpellary, syncarpous and pentalocular

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Students can Download Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom Questions and Answers, Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Artificial system of classification is mainly based on
(a) vegetative characters
(b) androecium structure
(c) habit and habitat
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 2.
Fusion between morphologically alike gametes is referred to as
(a) anisogamy
(b) isogamy
(c) oogamy
(d) sygamy
Answer:
(b) isogamy

Question 3.
Gametophytic generation is dominant in
(a) bryophytes
(b) pteridophytes
(c) angiosperms
(d) gymnosperms
Answer:
(a) bryophytes

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 4.
Mycorrhizal roots of _____ are associated with some fungal symbionts
(a) Cedrus
(b) pinus
(c) cycas
(d) lichens
Answer:
(b) pinus

Question 5.
Haplontic life cycle is generally occurs in
(a) algae
(b) pteridophytes
(c) bryophytes
(d) gymnosperms
Answer:
(a) algae

Question 6.
Name the type of cell division which produce four haploid cells with new combination of characters from a diploid cell.
Answer:
Meiosis.

Question 7.
Name the dominating pigment in red algae.
Answer:
Phycoerythrin

Question 8.
Name the algae from which algin is prepared commercially.
Answer:
Laminaria (brown algae)

Question 9.
Name the filamentous structure that appears in the mosses due to the germination of spores.
Answer:
Protonema

Question 10.
Give an example of plant group which produce seed but not fruit.
Answer:
Gymnosperms

Question 11.
What is the genetic constitution of endosperm of angiosperm.
Answer:
Triploid

Question 12.
Fill in the blanks.

  1. Bryophytes – Haplo-diplontic
    Gymnosperms – ________
  2. Algin – Brown algae
    Carrageen – _______

Answer:

  1. Diplontic
  2. Red algae

Question 13.
If chlorophyll b is for Chlorophyceae, chlorophyll d is for _______
Answer:
Rhodophyceae

Question 14.
Pick out the correct pairs of plant groups that bearing archegonium.
(a) gymnosperm angiosperm
(b) angiosperm Bryophyta
(c) Bryophyta Pteridophyta
(d) Pteridophyta gymnosperm
Answer:
(d) Pteridophyta gymnosperm

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question. 15
Select the odd one.
(Nitrosomonas, archaebacteria, Nitrococcus, Nitrobacteria)
Answer:
Archaebacteria

Question 16.
The majority of pteridophytes are homosporous ie. they produce similar kind of spores. Give one example of a heterosporous pteridophyte.
Answer:
Selaginella

Question 17.
Archaebacteria, special type of bacteria, which are able to survive in extreme conditions, What is the feature helping them for this?
Answer:
Structure of the cell wall.

Question 18.
Complete the following:
1. Plasmogamy: Fusion of Protoplasms
……………: Fusion of nuclei
Answer:
karyogamy

Question 19.
Laminarin is a stored food in Phaeophyceae, what is the stored food in Rhodophyceae?
Answer:
Floridean starch

Question 20.
The essential element is present in the ring structure of chlorophyll. Which is the element?
Answer:
Mg.

Question 21.
By observing the relationship of the first and fill up the second.
1. Algae and Fungi: Lichen
Roots of higher plants and Fungus:………….
Answer:
Mycorrhiza

Question 22.
Observe the relationship between the first two terms and fill up the blank.

  1. Moss: Protonema; Fern ………….
  2. Egg: Zygote; …………; PEN

Answer:

  1. Prothallus
  2. Secondary Nucleus

Question 23.
Pick the odd one out from the following and justify your answer.
Chlamydomonas, Volvox, laminaria, Chara.
Answer:
laminaria-brown algae

Question 24.
Choose the correct answer.

  1. food materials in fungi are stored in the form of (glucose, glycogen, sucrose, starch)
  2. Membrane covering the vacuole (meninges, tonoplast, pleura).

Answer:

  1. Glycogen
  2. Tonoplast

Question 25.
Name the organisms which are not included in any of the kingdoms,
Answer:
Viruses

Question 26.
Name the plant group in which ‘protonema’ is present.
Answer:
Bryophytes

Question 27.
Observe the relationship between the first two pairs and fill up the blanks.

  1. Sac fungi: Ascomycetes
    Imperfect fungi: …………
  2. Transpiration: Loss of water in the form of water vapour.
    ……………: Loss of water in the form of liquid

Answer:

  1. Deuteromycetes
  2. Guttation

Question 28.
Fusion of two gametes which are dissimilar in size is termed as
(a) Oogamy
(b) Isogamy
(c) Anisogamy
(d) Zoogamy
Answer:
(c) Anisogamy

Question 29.
Holdfast, stipe, and frond constitutes the plant body in case of
(a) Rhodophyceae
(b) Chlorophyceae
(c) Phaeophyceae
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(c) Phaeophyceae

Question 30.
Food is stored as Floridean starch in Rhodophyceae. Mannitol is the reserve food material of which group of algae?
Answer:
Brown algae

Question 31.
A plant shows thallus level of organization. It shows rhizoids and is haploid. It needs water to complete its life cycle because the male gametes are motile. Identify the group to which it belongs to
Answer:
Bryophytes

Question 32.
My body is a gametophyte and I grow under moist and shaded conditions. My group is commonly known as amphibians of the plant kingdom. Name my group.
Answer:
Bryophyta

Question 33.
Name the gametophyte that is free-living structure formed in pteridophytes.
Answer:
Prothallus

Question 34.
The plant body in higher plants is well differentiated and well developed. Roots are the organs used for the purpose of absorption. What is the equivalent of roots in the less developed lower plants?
Answer:
Rhizoids

Question 35.
Plants are generally autotrophic. Can you think of certain plants that are partially heterotrophic?
Answer:
Loranthus – Partial stem parasite

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 36.
Choose the correct pair.
(a) Spirogyra – Algae
(b) Sphagnum – Gymnosperm
(c) Selaginella – Bryophyte
(d) Funaria – Pteridophyte
Answer:
(a) Spirogyra – Algae

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Diagrams of three bryophytes are given below.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img1

 

  1. Observe and give the names of these bryophytes.
  2. Which of the three bryophytes is the most advanced?

Answer:
1. names of these bryophytes.

  • A – Riccia,
  • B – Marchantia,
  • C – Funaria

2. Funaria

Question 2.
Observe the relationship between the first two terms and fill up the blanks.

  1. Kingdom fungi – multicellular decomposer
    Kingdom Plantae – _____________
  2. Gymnosperm – Cone
    Angiosperm – _____________

Answer:

  1. Kingdom plantae – multicellular producers
  2. Angiosperm – flower

Question 3.
Bryophytes are “amphibians of the plant kingdom”. Comment.
Answer:
The vegetative structure are well adapted to live on land but water is essential for fertilization.

Question 4.
Prothallus is the gametophytic stage of Pteridophyte What is protonema?
Answer:
Protonema is the young stage of moss gametophyte

Question 5.

AB
Chlamydomonas

Cycas

Selaginella

Sphagnum

Moss

Pteridophytes

Algae

gymnosperms

Answer:

AB
Chlamydomonas

Cycas

Selaginella

Sphagnum

Algae

Gymnosperms

Pteridophytes

Moss

Question 6.
Analyse the table and arrange the matter in an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img2
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img3

Question 7.
Lichens are the symbiotic association between algae and fungi.

  1. What is symbiosis?
  2. How both the partners help each other?

Answer:
1. Relationship between 2 organisms, both are benefited.

2. Algae – prepare food
Fungus – Gives shelter to algae

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 8.
Arrange the following plants in the table given below, (two members from each group)
Riccia, Spirogyra, Adiantum, Chlorella, Funaria, Cycas, Nephrolepis, Pinus.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img4
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img5

Question 9.
The following is a list of plants. Arrange them in the table given below.
Marchantia, Selaginella, Salvinia, Sunflower, Funaria, Pinus, Maize, Cycas.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img6
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img7

Question 10.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img8

  1. Identify the life cycle pattern?
  2. Cite two examples of organisms showing the above life cycle pattern?

Answer:

  1. Haplo-diplontic.
  2. Bryophytes and pteridophytes

Question 11.
The classical Taxonomy of organisms is mainly based . on morphological characters. But modern taxonomy gives equal weightage to all characters.
Answer:

  1. Name this new approach in modern taxonomy.
  2. Mention any two branches of this taxonomy.

Answer:

  1. Numerical taxonomy
  2. Chemo taxonomy, cytotaxonomy

Question 12.

AB
Sargassum

Bryophyte

ABA

Ribosomes

Anabaena

Stomatal movement

Palade

N2 fixation

Brown alga

Sphagnum

Answer:

AB
SargassumBrown alga
BryophyteSphagnum
ABAStomatal movement
RibosomesPalade
AnabaenaN2 fixation

Question 13.
Pick up the odd one.

  1. Oscillatoria, Spirulina, Actinomycetes, Nostoc
  2. Epipetalous, Epiphyllous, Monadelphous, Apocarpous.

Answer:

  1. Actinomycetes
  2. Apocarpous

Question 14.
Green algae are considered as the ancestors of angiosperms.

  1. Is this statement correct?
  2. Justify your answer.

Answer:

  1. Yes
  2. Chloroplast is present

Question 15.
Red algae reach the maximum depth in sea where no other photosynthetic form grow. Justify.
Answer:
The pigment phycoerythrin absorb the blue-green part of the sunlight’s spectrum. The blue-green light has short wavelength and penetrates deep into the water.

Question 16.
During summer you cannot see the growth of Funaria. What is the reason for this?
Answer:
Water is needed for reproduction – amphibians of plant kingdom.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 17.
By observing the relationship between the first pair, fill up the blanks.

  1. Chlorophyceae: Starch: Rhodophyceae: ……………….
  2. Moss:Protonema; Nephrolepis : ………….

Answer:

  1. Floridean starch
  2. Prothallus

Question 18.
Match the following. (Column I with Column II)
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img9
Answer:

Column IColumn II
a) ChlamydomonasAlgae
b) CycasGymnosperm
c) SelaginellaPteridophyte
d) SphagnumMoss

Question 19.
Observe the relationship between first two terms and fill up the blanks.

  1. Phycobiont: Algal partner
    ……………: Fungal partner
  2. Rhizopus: Phycomycetes
    Penicillin: ………….

Answer:

  1. Mycobiont
  2. Ascomycetes

Question20.
When & where does reduction division takes place in the life cycle of liverwort, moss, ferns, gymnosperm, and angiosperm?
Answer:

  • Liver wort – Reduction division takes place inside the capsule at the time of spore production.
  • Moss – Reduction division takes place inside the capsule at the time of spore formation.
  • Ferns- Reduction division takes place in sporangium in the leaves at the time of spore formation.
  • Gymnosperm – Reduction divsion takes place in the sporangium born on sporophyte of cone.
  • Angiosperm – reduction division takes place at the time of gamete formation in male & female gametophyte during sexual reproduction.

Question 21.
Observe the given table and arrange the matter in an appropriate order.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img10
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img11

Question 22.
Complete the table using appropriate terms.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img12
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img13

Question 23.
What is the basis of the classification of algae?
Answer:
Algae is classified on the basis of pigment Sreserve food.
Eg:

  • Green algae(Chlorophyceae)
  • Red algae(Rhodophyceae)
  • Brown algae(Phaeophyceae)

Question 24.
Liverworts, mosses and ferns usually grow near water. Comment.
Answer:
External water is required for dehiscence of antheridia, liberation of antherozoids, transfer of antherozoids from antheridia to archegonia, opening of archegonial neck and the movement of antherozoids into the archegonial neck for fertilisation during sexual reproduction.

Question 25.
Both gymnosperm & Angiosperm are seed-bearing plants. Why are they classified separately?
Answer:
Gymnosperm and angiosperm are seed-producing plants. In gymnosperm ovules or seeds are not enclosed by ovary wall after fertilisation. In angiosperm, the seeds are protected by ovary wall after fertilisation.

Question 26.
Some characteristic features of the plant is given below.

  • The main plant body posesses rhizoids.
  • The nucleus of main plant body have haploid chromosome number.
  • Zygote develops into a new plant which is dependant on main plant body.
  • The sporophyte has foot, seta, and capsule.

1. Identify the plant.
2. Name the cells where reduction division (meiosis) takes place in the life cycle of the plant.
Answer:

  1. Moss plant
  2. Spore mother cells

Question 27.
Differentiate between the following,

  1. Red algae & Brown algae
  2. Liverworts & Mosses
  3. Homosporous & Heterosporous
  4. Sygamy & Triple fusion

Answer:
1.

Red AlgaeBrown Algae
1. Rhodophycea1. Phaeophycea
2. Predominant pigment is phycoerythrin2. Predominant pigment is fucoxanthin
3. Stored food is laminarin and mannitol3. Stored food is floridean starch

2.

Liver wortsMosses
1. Dorsiventral thallus1. The plant is upright bearing leaves, & rhizoids
2.  Asexual reproduction by fragmentation & gemma2. Asexual reproduction by budding
3.  Protonema absent3.  Protonema stage present

3.

HomosporousHetero sporous
1.  Spores are of same type1.  Spores produce are 2 types
2.  Gametophyte is prothallus & develops male & female sex organs2.  Female Gemetophyte is retained in the parent sporophyte

4.

SygamyTriple fusion
1. The fusion between egg & sperm to give rise to diploid zygote
egg + sperm = zygoten           n              2n
1. The fusion between the secondary nucleus and male gamete to form the Primary endosperm nucleus.
secondary nucleus + sperm =PEN                                     n                                  n           2n

Question 28.
The following is a list of plants.
Riccia, Chlorella, Selaginella, Adiantum, Chalamydomas, Sugarcane, Funaria, Gnetum, Ficus, Cycas. Categorise these plants into Algae, Bryophytes, Gymnosperms, and Angiosperms.
Answer:

  • Algae – Chlorella, Chlamydomonas
  • Bryophytes – Riccia, Funaria
  • Pteridophytes – Selaginella, Adiantum
  • Gymnosperms-Gnetum, Cycas
  • Angiosperms- Sugarcane, Ficus

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 29.
Some plants of cycas produce seeds, but not others. Justify.
Answer:
Cycas plants are dioecious. Male plants of cycas produce microsporophylls and female plants produce megasporophyll. So only female cycas produce seeds and not the males.

Question 30.
Complete the table using the following terms.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img15
Primitive vascular plants, Sprogyra, Triploid endosperm, Marchantia, Naked seeded plants, Pteris, Aquatic autotrophs, Wolfie, Amphibians of plant Kingdom, Pinus
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img16

Question 31.
The following is the list of plants Arrange them in the table given below.
Marchantia, Chlorella, Lycopodium, Adiantum, Clamydomonas, Sunflower, Funaria, Gnetum, Cycas, Maize.
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img17
Answer:
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img18

Question 32.
The haplodiplontic life cycle is present in fern plants. Justify your answer.
Answer:
ln fern plants, the haploid phase is alternate with diploid phase in life cycle. Haploid and diploid phases have equal weightage in life cycle.

Question 33.
What is mixotrophic mode of nutrition?
Answer:
It is the type of nutrition found in Euglena that means both autotrophic and heterotrophic nutrition.

Question 34.
Why seed plants are most successful of all land plants?
Answer:
They are most successful of all land plants because external supply of water is not required for fertilization.

Question 35.
How bryophytes are advanced over algae?
Answer:
In higher bryophytes plant body is differentiate into root-like,stem-like and leaf-like structures. They also shows amphibious habit.

Question 36.
Differentite between gametophyte and sporophyte.
Answer:
Gametophyte is haploid and bears gametes. Sporophyte is diploid and bears spores

Question 37.
In which plant will you look for mycorrhiza and corolloid roots? Also explain what these terms mean, pinus and cycas.
Answer:

  1. Mycorrhiza – association of root and fungus
  2. Corolloid root – association of root and N2 fixing cyanobacteria.

Question 38.
Why rhizoids are not called roots?
Answer:
Rhizoids are haploid and lack vascular tissue, on the other hand, roots are diploid and bear vascular tissue.

Question 39.
Both gymnosperms and angiosperms bear seeds, then why are they classified separately?
Answer:
Because the gymnosperms are plants that bear ovules that are not covered by any ovary wall i.e the seeds of gymnosperms are not covered( naked). But in the angiosperms the seeds remain enclosed inside the fruits.

Question 40.
Why are some bryophytes called liverworts?
Answer:
Some bryophytes are called liverworts because their gametophyte resembles liver lobes.

Question 41.
Heterospory i.e., formation of two types of spores microspores and megaspores is a characteristic feature in the life cycle of a few members of pteridophytes and all spermatophytes. Do you think heterospory has some evolutionary significance in plant kingdom?
Answer:
It is considered as precursor to seed habit. The microspores of angiosperms develops into male gametophyte and megaspores develops into female gametophyte or embryosac.

Question 42.
Most algal genera show a haplontic lifestyle. Name an alga which is

  1. Haplo-diplontic
  2. Diplontic

Answer:

  1. Ectocarpus, polysiphonia and kelps
  2. Fucus

Question 43.
What is heterospory? Give its significance?
Answer:
Heterospory is the production of two kinds of spores in pteridophytes. EgfSalvina and Selaginella They produces 2 kind of spores i.e macrospores- these are large in size and microspores-these are small in size.

Question 44.
The spores and gametes produced by some members of algae are nonmotile.

  1. Do you agree the above statement.
  2. Give reasons.

Answer:

  1. Yes
  2. In members of red algae, the pear-shaped spores and gametes do not possess flagella, hence they are non-motile.

Question 45.
Nature of spore development is different in bryophytes and pteridophytes.

  1. Give the common name for the structures arise from spores.
  2. Identify these two.

Answer:

  1. Gametophyte
  2. Protonema and Prothallus

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 46.

  1. Name the diploid and triploid products formed in Embryosac after fertilisation.
  2. What will be the fate of haploid structures not participate in fertilisation?

Answer:

  1. Diploid – Zygote,
    Triploid – PEN
  2. Synergids and antipodals degenerate after fertilisation.

Question 47.

  1. Identify the types of associations in some members of gymnosperms
  2. Name organisms forms in such associations

Answer:

  1. Mycorrhiza and corrolloid root
    Mycorrhiza – pinus and fungus,
  2. Corrolloid root – N2 fixing cyanobacteria and cycas

Question 48.

  1. Differentiate the nature of plant body in Bryophytes and gymnosperms.
  2. Identify the life cycle shown by the above two plant group

Answer:

  1. Bryophytes – Thallus type (plant body is not differentiated)
    Gymnosperms – Plant body is differentiated into root, stem, and leaves
  2. Bryophytes – Haplo-diplontic
    Gymnosperms – Diplontic

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Mark the statement Ture or False,

  1. Potato, ginger, turmeric are underground stems. They are modified to store food in them
  2. Phyllotaxy is the pattern of arrangement of leaves on the stem or branch
  3. A flower having only stamens or carpel is bisexual.
  4. Calyx and corolla are reproductive organs
  5. Lamina is the green expanded part of the leaf with veins and veinlets
  6. In racemose inflorescence, the main axis terminates in a flower.
  7. Ovary in epigynous flower is superior
  8. If the margin of sepals or petals overlap one another but not in particular direction, the aestivation is called imbricate.
  9. A sterilse stamen is called staminode
  10. The seed coat has two layers the outer testa and the inner tegmen.

Answer:

  1. True
  2. True
  3. False
  4. False
  5. True
  6. False
  7. False
  8. True
  9. True
  10. True

Question 2.
What is heterospory. Give brief account of its significance with examples.
Answer:
Hetrospory is the production of 2 types of spores, Macro (large) and Micro(Small). They give rise to female and male gametophyte respectively. The gamete fused to form zygote which retained in the female gametophyte. This event can be considered as a precursor of seed habit and is an important step in evolution.

Question 3.
Mention the ploidy of the following.

  1. Protonemal cell of a moss
  2. Primary endosperm nucleus in dicot.
  3. Leaf cell of moss.
  4. Fern Prothalus
  5. Meristem cell of monocot
  6. Ovum cell of liverwort
  7. Zygote of a fern

Answer:

  1. n – Haploid
  2. 3n triploid
  3. n – haploid
  4. n – haploid
  5. 2n – diploid
  6. n – haploid
  7. 2n)diploid

Question 4.
Explain briefly the following term with suitable examples. Protonejjia, Antheridium, Archegonium, Diplonticand Sporophyll.
Answer:

  1. Protonema – the 1st gametophytic stage developed by the germination of spores in Bryophytes
  2. Antheridium – Male sex organs which produce flagellated motile male gamtes. eg: Bryophyte
  3. Archegonium – Female sex organ which produce nonmotile egg it is a flask shaped. eg: pteridophyte & Gymnosperm
  4. Diplontic – Diploid sporophytic generation is dominant photosynthetic independent phase of the plant and gametophytic phase is represented by haploid gametophyte eg: gymnosperm & angiosperm

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question. 5
Based on the relationship, fill in the blanks:

  1. Nephrolepis:Prothallus:: Funaria: ……….
  2. Penicillium: ………..:: Agaricus Basidiocarp
  3. …………… Phaeophyceae::Carageen: Rhodophyceae

Answer:

  1. Protonema
  2. Conidia
  3. Mannitol

Question. 6
A few statements regarding algae are given below. Study them carefully and state true or false. If false make them correct.

  1. Algae are thallophytes.
  2. Volvox is a red algae.
  3. Algin is obtained from red algae.
  4. Floridean starch is found in green algae.
  5. Green algae are known as Rhodophyte.
  6. Green algae possess chlorophyll a

Answer:

  1. True
  2. False. Green algae 1
  3. False. Brown algae
  4. False. Red algae
  5. False. Chloropyta
  6. True

Question.7
Write a note on the economic importance of algae & gymnosperm.
Answer:
Algae – increase the level of oxygen in enviomment. They are the chief producers in aquatic ecosystems Some species of brown algae like sargassum, laminaria & Porphyra are used as food. Red algae and brown algae produce hydrocolloids which are water-holding substances. Eg: Gracilaria & gelidium Clorella is used as food supplement by space travelers.

Gymnosperm – Produce alkaloids like terpentine from the stem. They are grown as an ornamental plant. Certain species like ephedra are medicinal.

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom NCERT Questions and Answers

Question 1.
How would you distinguish monocots from dicots?
Answer:

  • The easiest way is by looking at their seeds. Seeds of monocots have one cotyledon while that of dicots have two cotyledons.
  • Dicots have tap root system, while monocots have fibrous root system.
  • Dicots show reticulate venation, while monocots show parallel venation.

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 2.
Match the followings (column I with column II)
Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom img19
Answer:

  • a) – iii
  • b) – iv
  • c) – ii
  • d) – i

Question 3.
What is heterospory? Briefly comment on its significance. Give two examples.
Answer:
Certain pteridophytes produce two kinds of spores. This phenomenon is called heterospory.

Question 4.
Both gymnosperms and angiosperms bear seeds, then why are they classified separately?
Answer:
The seeds of gymnosperms are naked, while that of angiosperms are covered by a membrane. That is why they are classified separately.

Question 5.
What is the basis of classification of algae?
Answer:
The main basis of classification of algae is the presence or absence of pigments, which impart an algae
its colour.
1. Chiorophyceae contains chlorophyll a and b, giving it the green colourand the name ‘green algae’.

2. Phaeophyceae contains chlorophyll a and c and fucoxanthin. The fucoxanthin gives it the brown colourand hence the name ‘brown algae’.

3. Rhodophyceae contains chlorophyll a and d and phycoerythrin. The phycoerythrin gives the distinct red colour and hence the name ‘red algae’.

Plus One Botany Plant Kingdom Multiple Choice Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The major pigment present in brown algae is
(a) chlorophyll a
(b) fucoxanthin
(c) Floridian starch
(d) phycoerythrin
Answer:
(b) fucoxanthin

Question 2.
Hetrospory is first noticed in
(a) gymnosperm
(b) pteridophytes
(c) gymnosperm
(d) ferns
Answer:
(b) pteridophytes

Question 3.
Mycorrhizal association is found in the root of
(a) ferns
(b) pinus
(c) cycas
(d) potytrichum
Answer:
(b) pinus

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 4.
Which one of the following belongs to brown algae
(a) polysiphonia
(b) ectocarpus
(c) ulothrix
(d) volvox
Answer:
(b) ectocarpus

Question 5.
Sexual reproduction of bryophytes involves the production of
(a) sperms
(b) biflagellate antherozooids
(c) antheroids
(d) cilliate antherozooids
Answer:
(b) biflagellate antherozooids

Question 6.
The asexual reproductive structures occurs in bryophytes are
(a) zoospores
(b) gemmae
(c) fronds
(d) rhizoids
Answer:
(b) gemmae

Question 7.
Protonema stage occurs when
(a) spore of bryophytes germinate
(b) seed germinates
(c) spore of ferns germinate
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(a) spore of bryophytes germinate

Question 8.
PEN is formed in
(a) angiosperm
(b) pteridophytes
(c) gymnosperm
(d) ferns
Answer:
(a) angiosperm

Question 9.
The life cycle occurs in ectocarpus is
(a) haplontic
(b) haplodiplontic
(c) diplontic
(d) none of the above
Answer:
(b) haplodiplontic

Question 10.
Prothallus is
(a) photosynthetic gametophyte
(b) photosynthetic sporophyte
(c) non photosynthetic gametophyte
(d) non photosynthetic sporophyte
Answer:
(a) photosynthetic gametophyte

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 11.
Phylogenetic system of classification is mainly based on
(a) embryological characters
(b) evolutionary characters
(c) morphological Characters
(d) floral characters
Answer:
(b) evolutionary characters

Question 12.
Classification based on cytological information, chromosome number etc.called
(a) chemotaxonomy
(b) cytotaxonomy
(c) numerical taxonomy
(d) cytogenetics
Answer:
(b) cytotaxonomy

Question 13.
In which of the following groups would you place plants having vascular tissue but lacking seeds
(a) pteridophytes
(b) gymnosperms
(c) angiosperms
(d) bryophytes
Answer:
(a) pteridophytes

Question 14.
Life cycle found in pteridophytes
(a) haplontic
(b) diplontic
(c) haplo-diplontic
(d) either haplontic or diplontic
Answer:
(c) haplo-diplontic

Question 15.
Fucoxanthin is the chief pigment in
(a) red algae
(b) brown algae
(c) green algae
(d) blue green algae
Answer:
(b) brown algae

Question 16.
Algae which grow on animals and also occur on shells of molluscs or other invertebrates are called
a) parasitic
b) epiphytic
c) epizoic
d) coenobia

Question 17.
Xylem of gymnosperm lack
(a) tracheids
(b) vessels
(c) both a and b
(d) fibres
Answer:
(b) vessels

Question 18.
Pyrenoids are present in
(a) angiosperms
(b) gymnosperms
(c) algae
(d) pteridophytes
Answer:
(c) algae

Plus One Botany Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Plant Kingdom

Question 19.
The first plants to appear after forest fire are the ferns this is because of the survival of their
(a) fronds
(b) rhizome
(c) spores
(d) both a and c
Answer:
(b) rhizome

Question 20.
The endosperm of gymnosperm is
(a) diploid
(b) triploid
(c) tetraploid
(d) haploid
Answer:
(d) haploid

 

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Students can Download Chapter 2 Arrays Questions and Answers, Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Plus Two Computer Application Arrays One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
From the following which is not true for an array
(a) It is easy to represent and manipulate array variable
(b) Array uses a compact memory structure
(c) Readability of program will be increased
(d) Array elements are dissimilar elements
Answer:
(d) Array elements are dissimilar elements.

Question 2.
Consider the following declaration. int mark (50).
Is it valid? If no give the correct declaration.
Answer:
It is not valid. The correct declaration is as follows, int mark[50]. Use square brackets instead of parenthesis.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 3.
Consider the following declaration. int mark[200].
The index of the last element is____.
Answer:
199.

Question 4.
Consider the following declaration int mark[200]
The index of the first element is_____
Answer:
0.

Question 5.
Consider the following int age[4]={15, 16, 17, 18};
From the following which type of initialisation is this.
(a) direct assignment
(b) along with variable declaration
(c) multiple assignment
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) along with variable declaration

Question 6.
From the following which is used to read and display array elements
(а) loops
(b) if
(c) switch
(d) if else ladder
Answer:
(a) loops

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 7.
Write down the corresponding memory consumption in bytes

  1. int age[10]=_____
  2. charname[10] =_____
  3. intage[10][10]=____

Answer:

  1. 4*10 = 40 bytes (4 bytes for one integer)
  2. 1*10=10 (one byte for each character)
  3. 4*10*10 = 400 (4 * 100 elements)

Question 8.
Consider the following intage[4] = {12, 13, 14};
cout<<age[3]; What will be the output?
(а) 14
(b) 12
(c) 13
(d) 0
Answer:
(d) 0

Question 9.
The elements of 2-dimensional array can be read using_____loop
Answer:
nested loop.

Question 10.
_____is the process of reading / visiting elements of an array
Answer:
traversal.

Question 11.
Anjaly wants to read the 10 marks that already stored in an array and find the total. This process is known as_____
(a) insertion
(b) deletion
(c) traversal
(d) linear search
Answer:
(c) traversal

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 12.
The elements of an array of size ten are numbered from____to___.
Answer:
0 to 9.

Question 13.
Element mark[6] is which element of the array?
(a) The sixth
(b) the seventh
(c) the eighth
(d) impossible to tell
Answer:
(b) the seventh

Question 14.
When a multidimensional array is accessed, each array index is
(a) Separated by column.
(b) Surrounded by brackets and separated by commas.
(c) Separated by commas and surrounded by brackets.
(d) Surrounded by brackets.
Answer:
(d) surrounded by brackets

Question 15.
Write a C++ statement that defines a string variable called ‘name’ that can hold a string of upto 20 characters.
Answer:
char name[21];

Question 16.
_____is a collection of elements with same data type
Answer:
Array

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 17.
Following are some of the statements regarding array. Identify the correct statement.
(a) Array is a collection of elements of same data type.
(b) Array cannot be initialised during the time of declaration.
(c) Array allocates continuous memory.
(d) An array element can be accessed using index or subscript.
Answer:
(a) Array is a collection of elements of same data type.

Question 18.
Which of the following is the correct declaration of an array?
(a) int a(10);
(b) int 10[a];
(c) a[1] int;
(d) inta[10];
Answer:
(d) int a[10];

Question 19.
Which is the last subscript of the array int m[25]?
(a) 24
(b) 25
(c) 0
(d) 26
Answer:
(a) 24

Question 20.
The memory size of the data type float is 4 bytes. What is the total bytes required for the array declaration float salary[10];?
(a) 10
(b) 4
(c) 40
(d) 400
Answer:
(c) 4*10 = 40.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 21.
int num[100]; The above statement declares an array named num that can store maximum_____integer numbers.
(a) 99
(b) 100
(c) 101
(d) Any number
Answer:
(b) 100

Question 22.
If int a[10]; is array, then which element of the array will be referenced as a[4].
Answer:
Fifth element.

Question 23.
Consider the following array declaration int A[ ] = {4, 5, 8}; int B[ ]={2, 10};
Write a valid C++ statement for finding the difference between the last element of the array ‘B’ and the first element of the array ‘A’.
Answer:
B[1] – A[0]; ORA[0] – B[1];

Question 24.
Consider the following code and predict the output.
int sum=0;
int a[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5};
for(i=0;i<4;++i)
{
sum=sum+a[i];
}
cout<<sum;
Answer:
10.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 25.
Which data type is used to declare a variable to hold string data?
Answer:
The data type char is used for this.

Question 26.
The terminating character of string array is______
Answer:
\0 or NULL character.

Question 27.
Write a statement for storing the string “NO SMOKING” using a character array with name ‘ARR’
of minimum size.
Answer:
char APR[11] = ”NO SMOKING”;

Plus Two Computer Application Arrays Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Given some array declaration. Pick the odd man out.
Float a[+40], int num[0-10], double [50]. char name[50], amount[20] of float.
Answer:
char name[50]. It is a valid array decalaration the remaining are not valid.

Question 2.
Whether the statement char text[] = “COMPUTER”; is True / False ? Justify.
Answer:
It is a single-dimensional array. If the user doesn’t specify the size the operating system allocates the number of characters + one (for null character for text) bytes of memory. So here OS allocates 9 bytes of memory.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 3.
Suppose you are given Total mark of 50 students in a class

  1. How will you store these values using ordinary variable?
  2. Is there any other efficient way to store these values? Give reason

Answer:
We have to declare 50 variables individually to store total marks of 50 students. It is a laborious work. Hence we use array, it is an efficient way to declare 50 variables.

With a single variable name we can store multiple elements. Eg: int mark[50]. Here we can store 50 marks. The first mark is in mark[0], second is in mark[1], …etc the fiftieth mark is in mark[49].

Question 4.
Consider the statement charstr[ ] = “PROGRAM” What will be stored in last location of this array. Justify
Answer:
The last location is the null character(\0) because each string must be appedend by a null character.

Question 5.
Explain the needs for arrays
Answer:
Array is collection of same type of elements. With the same name we can store more elements. The elements are distinguished by using its index or subscript. To store 50 marks of 50 students we have to declare 50 variables, it is a laborious work.

Hence the need for arrays arise. By using array this is very easy as follows int mark[50]. Here the index of first element is 0, then 1, 2, 3, etc upto 49.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 6.
Consider the following code and predict the output.
int a[5]= {6, 8, 10,20,40};
cout<<“\n”<<a[3];
cout<<“\n”<<a[1]+1[4];
Answer:
20(The fourth element).
48(Sum of second element 8 and fifth element 40, i.e 8 + 40 =48).

Question 7.
Suppose you need to store the value 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50 into an array. Write different methods to do this problem. Answer:
Method 1:
int a[5]={10, 20, 30, 40, 50};

OR

int a[ ]={10, 20, 30, 40, 50};

Method 2:
int a[5];
a[0]=10;
a[1]=20;
a[2]=30;
a[3]=40;
a[4]=50;

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 8.
What would be the appropriate array declaration to store the following?

  1. Name of a student
  2. Age of 20 students
  3. Mark of 6 subject
  4. Average mark of 10 students in 5 subjects

Answer:

  1. charname[20];
  2. intage[20];
  3. intmark[6];
  4. float mark[10];

Question 9.
Consider the following code and predict the output.
int A[5] = {11, 12, 13, 14, 15};
int i;
for (i=4;i>=0;–i)
{
cout<<“\n”<<A[i];
}
Answer:
It prints the array in reverse order as follows.
15
14
13
12
11.

Question 10.
Predict the output of the following code segment.
int K[ ] = {1, 2, 3, 4};
for (int i=0; i<4; i++)
cout<<K[i] * K[i]<<“\t”;
Answer:
The output is as follows
1 4 9 16
Hint: 1(1*1) 4(2*2) 9(3*3) 16(4*4).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 11.
Consider the following code and predict the output.
Justify your answer.
int A[10] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10};
int sum=0, i;
for(i=0;i<10;++i)
{
if (A[i]%2==0)
{
sum=sum+A[i];
}
}
cout<<“\nSum=”<<sum;
Answer:
The output is 30. That is sum of all even numbers in the array.

Question 12.
Predict the output of the following C++ statement.
char str[8] = “WELCOME”;
cout<<“\n’’<,str[3];
cout<<“\n”<<str;
Answer:
The output is as follows
C(The fourth character)
WELCOME.

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 13.
How many bytes will be allocated in the memory for storing the string “MY SCHOOL”? Justify your answer.
Answer:
A total of 10 bytes. 9 bytes is used to store 9 characters in the string MY SCHOOL(including 1 byte for space) and 1 byte is used to store the NULL character.

Plus Two Computer Application Arrays Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Total mark of 50 students in a class are given in an array. A bonus of 10 marks is awarded to all of them. Write the program code for making such a modification.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 1

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 2.
Write the program code for counting the number of vowels from your school name
Answer:
# include
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 2
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 3

Question 3.
Write the program code for counting the number of words from the given string.” Directorate of Higher Secondary Examination”
Answer:
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 4

OR

(Program for more than one space between words)
# include
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 5

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 6
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 7

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 4.
Given a word like “ECNALUBMA” Write the program code for arranging it in into a meaningful word Answer:
# include
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 8

Question 5.
Explain different types of arrays.
Answer:
1. Single dimensional:
It contains only one index or subscript. The index starts from 0 and ends with size-1.
Eg. int n[50]; charname[10];

2. Multidimensional:
It contains more than one index or subscript. The two dimensional array contains two indices, one for rows and another for columns. The row index starts from 0 and end at row size-1 and column index starts at 0 and ends at colunn size-1.
Eg. int n[10][10] can store 10 * 10 =100 elements. The index of the first element is n[0][0] and index of the 100th element is n[9][9].

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 6.
Write a program to read the 5 marks of a students and display the marks and total. Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 9

Question 7.
Explain different array operations in detail.
Answer:

  1. Traversal:- All the elements of an array is visited and processed is called traversal
  2. Search:- Check whether the given element is present or not
  3. Sorting:-Arranging elements in an order is called sorting.

Question 8.
Given a word “COMPUTER”, write a C++ program to reverse the word without using any string functions.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 10

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 9.
Write statements to declare an array and initialize it with the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and print 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
int a[5]={1, 2, 3, 4, 5},i;
for(i=4;i>=0;i-)
cout<<a[i]<<“,”;
}

Question 10.
Consider the following array declaration. Write statements to count how many numbers are greater than zero.
int p[ ] = {-5, 6, -7, 0, 8, 9};
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 11

Question 11.
Write a C++ program to read 10 integer values and find the largest number among them using array.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 12

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 12.
Write a C++ program to accept a string from the keyboard and find its length without using function. For example if “WELCOME” is accepted, the output will be 7.
Answer:
# include
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 13

Question 13.
Considerthe following C++ statements

  1. charword[20];
    cin>>word;
    cout<<word;
  2. char word[20];
    gets(word);
    puts(word);

If the string entered is “HAPPY NEW YEAR”. Predict the output in both cases and justify your answers.
Answer:

  1. HAPPY. When we use cin to accept string then space is the delimiter. The string after space is truncated.
  2. HAPPY NEW YEAR. gets() reads all the characters (including space) upto the user presses the enter key.

Question 14.
Consider the following C++ statements
char str[] = “NO/nSMOKING”;
cout<<str;

  1. What is the output of the above code?
  2. How many bytes will be allocated in the memory for the variable str?

Answer:

  1. NO
    SMOKING. The output is in 2 lines.
  2. A total of 11 bytes is used to store this string.

1 byte for \n. 1 byte for \0(The null character that is automatically appended) and 9 bytes for the remaining characters (N, 0, S, M, 0, K, l, N AND G).

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 15.
Write a C++ program to store the given string in an array and display it in reverse order without using string function. For example if ABCD is given, the output should be DCBA.
Answer:
# include
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 14

Plus Two Computer Application Arrays Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Collect the heights of 12 students from your class in which 7 students are male and others are female students. Suppose these male and female students be seated in two separate benches and you are given a place which is used for sitting these 12 students in linear form. How will you combine and make them sit without mixing male/female students? Write a program for the same.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 15

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 16

Question 2.
Write a program to read 3 marks of 5 students and find the total and display it
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 17

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 3.
Write a program to read a string and a character and find the character by using linear search.
Answer:
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 18

Question 4.
Write a program to read a string and find the no. of vowels consonents and special characters.
Answer:
# include
#include
#include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 19
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 20

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 5.
Write a program to accept marks of 10 students and find out the largest and smallest mark from the list.

OR

Write a C++ program to store the scores of 10 batsmen of a school cricket team and find the largest and smallest score.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 21

Question 6.
Write a C++ program to read 6 marks of a student and find total and average mark.
Answer:
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 22

Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays

Question 7.
Write a C++ proram to accept a sentence and count the number of times the letter ‘s’ occurs in it. For example if the sentence is This is my school’, the output should be 3.
Answer:
# include
# include
using namespace std;
int main()
Plus Two Computer Application Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 2 Arrays - 23

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Students can Download Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting Questions and Answers, Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations.

Kerala Plus Two Chemistry Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Plus Two Accountancy Data Base Management System for Accounting One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
DBMS stands for __________
Answer:
Data Base Management system.

Question 2.
Name of database object to hold data
(a) Tables
(b) Forms
(c) Queries
(d) Reports
Answer:
(a) Tables

Question 3.
LibreOffice Base is a
a) Word Processing Software
b) Presentation Software
c) Spread sheet Software
d) Data Base Management Software
Answer:
d) Data Base Management Software

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 4.
The common fields used in a relationship between tables are called
(a) Joint field
(b) Main field
(c) Key field
(d) Table field
Answer:
(c) Key field

Question 5.
The result of Query can be displayed by clicking on ___________
Answer:
Run Button

Question 6.
SQL stands for _______
Answer:
Structural Query Language

Question 7.
______ denotes the number of rows in the table
(a) Tuple
(b) Cardinality
(c) DBMS
(d) Domain
Answer:
(b) Cardinality

Question 8.
A single row in the table is called
(a) Attribute
(b) Tuple
(c) Column
(d) Cardinality
Answer:
(b) Tuple

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 9.
Database in LibreOffice Base is called ________
(a) Data group
(b) Mass Data
(c) Rows and columns
(d) Data Source
Answer:
(d) Data Source

Question 10.
A data base consists of a number of that ______ contains the individual pieces of data
Answer:
fields

Question 11.
A _________ of the database is a group of fields
(a) Table
(b) Forms
(c) Query
(d) None of these
Answer:
(a) Table

Question 12.
The data type suitable to the name of a person
Answer:
Text: [VARCHAR]

Question 13.
The default extension of LibreOffice Base file is
(a) .bmp
(b) .xls
(c) .lob
(d) .odb
Answer:
(d) .odb

Question 14.
Which among the format searches for all values ending with R?
(a) LIKE ‘*R*’
(b) LIKE ‘*R’
(c) LIKE ‘R*’
(d) LIKE ‘END\‘R’
Answer:
(b) LIKE ‘*R’

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 15.
ODBC stands for _______
Answer:
Open Database Connectivity

Question 16.
The data type suitable to the age of an employee is;
Answer:
Number (Numeric)

Question 17.
__________are used to store the data in the database
(a) Reports
(b) Forms
(c) Tables
(d) Queries
Answer:
(c) Tables

Question 18.
________ is a tool to connect tables in a database
(a) Forms
(b) Queries
(c) Relationships
(d) Fields
Answer:
(c) Relationships

Question 19.
Choose the right path to start up LibreOffice Base
(a) Applications → Office → LibreOffice Base
(b) Applications → Create → LibreOffice Base
(c) Applications → Login → Office → LibreOffice Base
(d) Applications → Create → Office → LibreOffice Base
Answer:
(a) Applications → Office → LibreOffice Base

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 20.
LibreOffice Base runs on _____ and _____ operating system
Answer:
Windows and Linux

Question 21.
Which among the following is not an advantage of LibreOffice Base
(a) The information is portable
(b) Ensure Data security
(c) Initial training is required for all users
(d) Many people can access the same database at the same time
Answer:
(c) Initial training is required for all users

Question 22.
Which among the following is not a component of Database system?
(a) Data
(b) Hardware
(c) Software
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 23.
RDBMs stands for ____________
Answer:
Relational Data Base Management System

Question 24.
The data type suitable to basic pay of employee:
Answer:
Number (Numeric)

Question 25.
What field type is used to store picture in a table?
Answer:
OLE object.

Question 26.
‘Join Line’ in the context of LibreOffice Base Tables means:
Answer:
Graphical representation of relationship between tables.

Question 27.
Reports are created from
(a) Tables
(b) Forms
(c) Relationships
(d) Tabs
Answer:
(a) Tables

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 28.
Database is referred to as _______________
(a) Front-end program
(b) Back – end program
(c) User-end program
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Back – end program

Question 29.
Which among the following is not a DBMS?
(a) Base
(b) Access
(C) Oracle
(d) None of these
Answer:
(d) None of these

Question 30.
Choose the right pairs.
(a) Desktop data base – Single user applications
(b) Desktop data base – Multi user applications
(c) Server data base – Multi user applications
(d) Server data base – Single user applications.
Answer:
(a) & (c)

Question 31.
_______ are the fundamental building blocks fo the database.
(a) Tables
(b) Forms
(c) Queries
(d) Reports
Answer:
(a) Tables

Question 32.
Each column of the table is called …..(a)…… and characteristics of which is called …….(b)…….
Answer:
(a) field
(b) attributes

Question 33.
The format for getting the employees whose names begins with ‘K’ is ______
Answer:
LIKE ‘K*’

Question 34.
To expect a well formatted printable data from LibreOffice Base database, we may use
Answer:
Report

Question 35.
__________ are used for connecting tables in database to get the advantage of data redundancy
(a) Relationships
(b) Primary key
(c) Forms
(d) Tables
Answer:
(a) Relationships

Question 36.
In a database context is a window or screen that contain numerous fields, or spaces to enter data
(a) Tables
(b) Forms
(c) Query
(d) Reports
Answer:
(b) Forms

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 37.
________ section contains the tittle of the report
(a) Field name
(b) Report header
(c) Form Header
(d) Report name
Answer:
(b) Report header

Question 38.
A ________ is a reference to a field in another relation or table
(a) Primary key
(b) Candidate key
(c) Foreign key
(d) Super key
Answer:
(c) Foreign key

Question 39.
The name which indicate the number of columns in the table
(a) Domain
(b) Tuple
(c) Degree
(d) Attribute
Answer:
(c) Degree

Question 40.
The end result of normalisation is known as ___________
Answer:
Refinement

Question 41.
Data type ‘Text’ can store up to characters
(a) 65,535
(b) 255
(c) 35,423
(d) 555
Answer:
(b) 255

Question 42.
Relationship between primary key of one table to primary key of another table is called
(a) One to one
(b) One to many
(c) Many to many
(d) Many to one
Answer:
(a) One to one

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 43.
A query criteria LIKE ‘RAJU*’ returns all names that: LIKE ‘RAJU*’
(a) Contains RAJU
(b) Starts with RAJU
(c) Ends with RAJU
(d) None of these
Answer:
(b) Starts with RAJU

Question 44.
The characteristics of an entity is ________________
Answer:
Attributes

Question 45.
The data type _______ can store upto 65, 535 characters
(a) Text
(b) Number
(c) Memo
(d) Date
Answer:
(c) Memo

Question 46.
Anything which has a real life existence is called ___________
Answer:
Entities

Question 47.
What criteria is used to get return a text starts with ‘A’
Answer:
LIKe ‘A*’

Question 48.
A text data field is used to hold ______ values
(a) Alpha numeric
(b) Numbers only
(c) Alphabets only
(d) Any data
Answer:
(a) Alpha numeric

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 49.
DBMS is an aggregate of data, hardware, software and ______
Answer:
Users

Question 50.
A _______ is a two dimensional array containing rows and columns
Answer:
Table

Plus Two Accountancy Data Base Management System for Accounting Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What do you mean by Data base?
Answer:
Database/ Data source – Introduction
A database is a collection of related data. It is organised in such a way that its contents can easily be accessed, managed and updated. In LibreOffice, database is also called data source.

Database consists of interrelated data tables that are structured in a manner that ensures-data consistency and integrity. LibreOffice base, MS Access, Oracle, SQL server, etc. Are the commonly used softwares for data base management.

Question 2.
Define Primary Key.
Answer:
Primary key is a unique key which identify a row in a table. A primary key comprises a single column or set of columns.

Question 3.
What are the different ‘views’ of a form?
Answer:
Form view, Layout view and Design view

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 4.
What are the components of Database system?
Answer:

  • Data
  • Hardware
  • Software
  • Users

Question 5.
What do you mean by Normalisation?
Answer:
Normalisation is the Alteration of tables that reduces data redundancy. Data redundancy means data duplication.

Question 6.
What are the different objects in LibreOffice Base?
Answer:
Tables, Relations, Forms, Queries and Reports.

Question 7.
Write the step for starting up Libre Office Base.
Answer:

  • Step 1 – Click on Applications
  • Step 2 – Select Office
  • Step 3 – Select LibreOffice Base

Path → Application → office → LibreOffice Base

Question 8.
What is an attribute?
Answer:
Attributes: These define the characteristics of an entity. Eg: Name, Age, Caste, Salary etc.

Question 9.
What do you mean by Query?
Answer:
Query:
Query is a question. Queries are used to view, change and analyse data in different ways. It creates a new table from the existing tables based upon the question/ request asked to the data base.

Question 10.
What is Join line?
Answer:
It is the graphical representation of relationship between tables.

Question 11.
What is relationships?
Answer:
These are links between tables.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 12.
How to run saved Query?
Answer:
Select Queries option from the left panel of the LibreOffice Base window. The saved query can be seen in the right side. Double click on the query name to run the query.

Question 13.
What are the different methods to create Forms in LibreOffice Base?
Answer:

  1. Create Form in Design view
  2. Use wizard to create Form

The second method is the easy way to create Forms in LibreOffice Base

Question 14.
How to close a Database file and Exit from it?
Answer:

  • Step 1 – Click on the File menu
  • Step 2 – Select Close

Then the file will be closed. To exit from the Base file, follow these steps:

  • Step 1 – Click on the File menu
  • Step 2 – Select exit LibreOffice

Question 15.
Give short note on Tables in LibreOffice Base
Answer:
A table is a database object used to store data about a particular subject. A table consists of records and fields, the columns are called fields the and rows are called records.

Question 16.
Write down the character length of the ‘Text’ data type and ‘memo’ data type.
Answer:

  • Text – 225 Characters
  • Memo – 65535 Characters

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 17.
List down the disadvantages of LibreOffice Base
Answer:
Disadvantages of database / Data source:

  1. Designing of database is a complex and time consuming process.
  2. Initial training is required for all the users.
  3. Installation cost is high.

Question 18.
Distinguish between database and database management system
Answer:
Database is a collection of data. It consists of inter-related data tables.
Database management system is a collection of programs that enables users to work on database. DBMS enables the user to create and maintain a database.

Question 19.
Match the following

  1. One to One Relationship – Non Primary Key to Non Primary Key
  2. One to Many Relationship – Primary key to Primary Key
  3. Many to Many Relationship – Non Primary key to Primary Key
  4. Many to One Relationship – Primary key to Non Primary Key

Answer:

  1. One to One Relationship – Primary key to Primary Key
  2. One to Many Relationship – Primary key to Non Primary Key
  3. Many to Many Relationship – Non Primary key to Non Primary Key
  4. Many to One Relationship – Non Primary key to Primary Key

Question 20.
What are the different methods for creating Queries?
Answer:

  • Using the Query Wizard
  • Using Design view

Plus Two Accountancy Data Base Management System for Accounting Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
List down the advantages of using Database.
Answer:
Advantage of database/ data source:

  1. All of the information is together
  2. The information is portable
  3. Information can be accessed at any time
  4. Many users can access the same database at the same time.
  5. Reduced data entry, storage and retrieval cost.

Question 2.
Explain the importance of Database Management System.
Answer:

  1. It helps to maintain records for ongoing use.
  2. It helps to generate reports based on the database.
  3. Mass volume of data can be managed easily.
  4. It is very useful; if the information stored in the system is subject to many changes.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 3.
Three options are available in database wizard to create a new database. What are they?
Answer:

  1. Create a new Database.
  2. Open an existing database.
  3. Connect to an existing database.

1.Create a new Database:
This option helps to create a new database with new tables, forms, queries, reports, etc.

2. Open an existing database:
This option helps to open an existing database file which had been created earlier.

3. Connect to an existing database:
This option helps to connect a database which is created on a server.

Question 4.
Distinguish between Desktop Database and Server Database.
Answer:

Desktop DatabaseServer Database
(a) It is single user database.(a) It is multi user database.
(b) It helps to do simple analysis and calculations.(b) It helps to do complex analysis and calculations.
(c) It is less expensive.(c) It is expensive.
(d) It is residing on personal computers.(d) It is residing on server computer.

Question 5.
List down the steps to create a Database in LibreOffice base
Answer:

  • Step 1 – Creation of Blank Database
  • Step 2 – Creation of Tables
  • Step 3 – Creation of Relationships
  • Step 4 – Creation of Forms
  • Step 5 – Creation of Queries
  • Step 6 – Creation of Reports

Question 6.
What are the different Data types commonly used in LibreOffice Base?
Answer:

  1. Text – Used to hold alphanumeric values
  2. Memo- Used to enter long pieces of text
  3. Number – Used to enter Numeric data
  4. Date – Used to enter data information
  5. Time – Used to enter time information

Question 7.
Some query criteria are given below. Write the query format.

  1. Search for all values which contain salary
  2. Search for all values beginning with K
  3. Search for all values ending with P
  4. Searches for all values beginning with Dr
  5. Searches for all values ending with Cr.

Answer:

  1. LIKE ‘*salary*’
  2. LIKE ‘K*’
  3. LIKE ‘*P’
  4. LIKE ‘Dr*’
  5. LIKE ‘*Cr’

Plus Two Accountancy Data Base Management System for Accounting Practical Lab Work Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Create a Table named ‘Tblstudents’ in LibreOffice Base with the following fields. Set the Admn No. as Primary Key
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 1
procedure:
Step 1 – Open Libre Office Base
Application → Office → LibreOffice Base.

Step 2 – Create a new database
Database wizard → Create a New Database → Next → Yes register the database for me → Open the database for editing Finish.

Step 3 – In Save Dialogue box, give the name STUDENTFEE and select a location to save the database and click Save button.
The new database file STUDENTFEE.odb. is created

Step 4 – Create Data Tables
From the left Database Pane, click on the icon Tables and below the Tasks section, click on ‘Create Table in Design view’
Database Pane → Tables → Create Table in Design view

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Step 5 – Field Name Entry
In Table creation Screen, Enter the Field names and select appropriate Data Types as given below.

Field NameData Type
Admn No.Number (Numeric)
Name of studentText (VARCHAR)
ClassText (VARCHAR)
Admission dateDate(DATE)
Fee PaidNumber (Numeric)

Step 6 – Setting Primary Key
To set the Admn No. as the Primary key, Right click on the row selector of Admn No. and select the Primary key from the drop down menu

Step 7 – Save Table
Click on Save button (or press Ctrl+S) to save the table. In save as dialogue box, Enter Tblstuderrts as table name and click on OK button Close the table creation screen

Step 8 – Data Entry
Database Pane → Tables → Created Tables → Select Tbl students → Double click to open it

Enter all the data given one by one

Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 2

Question 2.
Create Two Data Tables named TBLSTUDENT and TBLMARKS in LibreOffice Base with the following fields and show the relationship assuming that the first fields in both tables are set as primary keys

Table – 1
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 3
Table – 2
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 4
procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Base
Application → Office LibreOffice Base

Step 2 – Create new Database
Datebase wizard → Create a new database Next → Yes, register database for me → Open the data base for editing → click on Finish button

Step 3 – In save Dialogue box, give the name STUDENTFILE and select a location to save the database and click Save button.
The new database file STUDETFILE.odb is created

Step 4 – Create Data Tables
Create Table – 1
From the left Data base pane, click on the Icon Tables and below the Tasks section, click on ‘Create Table in Design view’,
Data base Pane → Tables → Create Table in Design view

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Step 5 – Field name Entry:
In Table creation screen, Enter the field names and select appropriate Data Types as given below

Field NameData Type
Admn No.Number (Numeric)
NameText (VARCHAR)
ClassText(VARCHAR)

Step 6 – Setting Primary key
To set Admn No as the primary key Right click → Primary key from the drop-down menu

Step 7 – Save Table
Press Ctrl+S on click on save button to save the table. Enter the name TBLSTUDENT → Click OK button.

Step 8 – Repeat the same steps for creating the second Table
Create Table -2

Field nameData Type
Class No.Number (Numeric)
MarkNumber (Numeric)

Set ‘Class No’ as the ‘Primary key’ save the table by naming TBLMARKS. Then close the table creation screen.

Step 9 – Data Entry
Data base Pane → Tables → Created Tables → Select → (Two tables TBLSTUDENT and TBLMARKS one by one) → Double click to open it
Enter all the details one by one.

Step 10 – Create Relationship
(a) Go to the Tools menu, select Relationships. Now Add Table dialogue box will appear. Add both the tables to the relationship window and close the Add Table dialogue box

(b) Create relationship between TBLSTUDENT and TBLMARK. Position the mouse pointer over the primary key of TBLSTUDENT table, hold down the left mouse button, drag the pointer right to the primary key in the TBLMARK table and then release the mouse button.

(c) Click on Save button in relation design window to save the relationship File → Save Click Close button to close the relation design window
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 5

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Question 3.
Create a Form in LibreOffice Base to Manage data in a table named customers with the following details.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 6
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice base
Application → Office LibreOffice Base

Step 2 – Create New Database
Database wizard → Create a new database Next → Yes, register database for me Open the database for edting → Click on Finish button

Step 3 – In save dialogue box, give the name CUSTOMERFILE . Select the location to save the database and cfick Save button.
The new database file CUSTOMERFILE.odb is created.

Step 4 – Create Data Tables
From the left database pane, click on the Icon Tables, and below the Tasks section, click on ‘Create Table in Design View’
Database Pane → Tables Create Tables in Design View

Step 5 – Enter necessary field names and select appropriate Data Type. Save the Table in the name TBLCUSTOMER and close the window

Step 6 – Create Form
From the left database pane, click on the Forms button and in right side, under Tasks section, click on Use Wizard to Create a Form.
Now Form wizard window opens
Data base Pane → Forms → Use wizard to create a Form

Step 7 – Selection of fields

  • In Form wizard, select TBLCUSTOMER from the combo box under the head Tables/Queries. → Click on Next button.
  • Add all Fields to Fields in the Form section in the right side by clicking >> button → Next button
  • Setup subform → Next → Arrange controls → Next
  • Set Data entry → Select The form is to display all data → Next → Apply styles → Next
  • Enter the name of the form inset Name Option as FORM CUSTOMER → select work with the Form → Finish

Now the data entry form will be opened

Step 8 – Data Entry in the form
Enter data in each field and Press Enter Key or Tab Key
Output:
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 7

Question 4.
Enter the following data in a database table
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 8

  • Display the names of students who scored greater than or equal to 500.
  • Display the name of student whose name begin with ‘S’

Procedure:
Step 1 – Open LibreOffice Base
Application → Office → LibreOffice Base

Step 2 – Create New Database
Datebase wizard → Create New Data base Next Yes, register the database form → Open the database for editing → Finish

Step 3 – In Save dialogue box, give the name STUDENTMARK and select the location to Save the data base and click Save button, the new data base file STUDENTMARK.odb. is created.

Step 4 – Create Data Table
From the left Database Pane, Click on the icon Tables, and below the Tasks section, Click on ‘Create Table in Design view’
Database Pane → Tables → Create Tables in Design view

Step 5 – Filed Name Entry
In Table creation Screen, Enter the Field names and select appropriate Data Types as given below

Step 6 – Setting Primary Key
To set STUDROLL_NO as primary key Right click → Select Primary key from the drop down menu

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Step 7 – Save Table
Click on Save button or Press Ctrl+S to save the table. In save as dialogue box, Enter TBLSTUDENTDETAILS as the name and dick on OK Button
Close the Table creation screen.

Step 8 – Data Entry
Data base pane → Tables → Created Tables → Select TBLSTUDENTDETAILS → Double click to open it Enter all the data on by one

Step 9 – Create Query

  • From the Data base Pane, Click on Queries button and in the right side under Task section, Click on Create Query in Design view. Now Add Table or Query Window opens.
  • Select the table TBLSTUDENTDETAILS and click Add button, then close the window.
  • In the Query Design window, double click on each Field in Table window to add all the fields to query design grid.

Step 10 – Enter Query Criteria (Question 1)
In Query design Grid, set the Criteria for the query.

  • Enter >=500, in the Criterion row in STUDMARK column.
  • Click on the RUN Query Button or Press F5 to display the result.
  • Save and close the query. File → Save. ‘Save as’ window opens. Give the name Query 1 and click on OK button.

Step 11 – Enter the Query Criteria (Question 2)
In the Query design grid, set the criteria for the query

a) Enter LIKE ‘S*’, in the criterion row in STUDNAME column.
b) Click on the Run Query Button or Press F5 to display the result.
c) Save and close the query.
File → Save. ‘Save as’ window opens. Give the name ‘Query 2’ and click on OK button.
Output – 1
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 9

Output – 2
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 10

Question 5.
Enter the following list of employees in Tblemployee and make a report from this table sorted in the order of Designation.
Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting - 11
Procedure:
Step 1 – Open Libre Office base

Step 2 – Create new database
Database wizard → Create a new database → Next → Yes, register database for me → Open the database for editing → Click on Finish Button.

Step 3 – In save dialogue box, give the name Employee file. Select the location to save the database and click Save button.
Now, the new database file Employeefile.odb is created.

Step 4 – Create data tables
From the left database pane, click on the icon Tables, and below the Tasks section, Click on Create Table in Design View. Database Pane → Tables → Create Tables in design view.

Step 5 – Enter the necessary field names and select appropriate Data Type. Save the Table in the name Tbl employee and close the window.

Step 6 – Create Report
In the left Pane of the data base window, click on the Reports button and in right side, Under Tasks section click on Use Wizard to create a Report. This will open a Report wizard.

Plus Two Accountancy Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Data Base Management System for Accounting

Step 7 – In Field selection step, under Tables Queries, Select the table Tblemployee. Then Press Add All buttons [>>] to all fields to report. Then click Next button.

Step 8 – Labelling fields (Skip this Step) → Next → Grouping Level (Skip this Step) → Next → In sort Option, Select Designation against sort by, and click Next button.

Step 9 – Choose Layout section, Select Tabular in the layout. → Click Next → In create Report Section → Give the tittle of Report as Report-Designation and select modify I Report Layout → Click Finish button.

Step 10 – Report Design window, click on Page Header area → Insert → Report controls → Label field to insert a Header for the report

Step 11 – Double click on the Label Field inserted and in the property window edit the Label as “Designation List of Employees” and Press Enter.

Step 12 – Click on Execute Report button to view the Report.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Uses of Statistical Methods

Students can Download Chapter 9 Uses of Statistical Methods Questions and Answers, Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Uses of Statistical Methods

Plus One Economics Uses of Statistical Methods One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
An essential part of a project report is
(i) Objectives
(ii) Methodology
(iii) Analysis
(iv) All the above
Answer:
(iv) All the above

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Uses of Statistical Methods

Question 2.
Data collection is covered under which part of a project works?
(i) Statement of the problem
(ii) Methodology
(iii) Analysis
(iv) Conclusion
Answer:
(ii) Methodology

Plus One Economics Uses of Statistical Methods Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
List the statistical tools you use for the analysis of data collected.
Answer:
The following statistical tools can generally be used for the analysis of data collected

  • Measure of central tendency
  • Standard deviation
  • Coefficient of variation
  • Regression
  • Correlation

Plus One Economics Uses of Statistical Methods Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Explain the steps towards making a project report.
Answer:
The following are the steps towards making a project report

  1. Identifying a problem or area of study
  2. Choice of target group
  3. Collection of data
  4. Organization and presentation of data
  5. Analysis and interpretation 0 Conclusion
  6. Bibliography

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Uses of Statistical Methods

Question 2.
Write down the features of a good questionnaire.
Answer:
The features of a gdb questionnaire are mentioned
below.

  1. The questionnaire should not be too long.
  2. The number of questions should be as minimum as possible.
  3. The series of questions should move from general to specific.
  4. The questions should be precise and clear.
  5. The questions should not be ambiguous, to enable the respondents to answer quickly, correctly and clearly.
  6. If possible ask ‘yes’ or ‘no’ questions.
  7. The question should not be a leading question, which gives a clue about how the respondent should answer.
  8. The question should not indicate alternatives to the answer.

Plus One Economics Uses of Statistical Methods Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Prepare a questionnaire to study the socio-economic conditions of students in your class.
Answer:
Questionnaire to study the socio-economic conditions

1. Name
2. Sex
3. Age
4. Class
5. The community to which you belong to
6. Details of family members:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Uses of Statistical Methods img1
7. Monthly income of the family

  • below 1000
  • between 1000 and 5000
  • between 5000 and 10000
  • above 10000

8. Do you live in the
a) rental house b) own house

9. Is your house electrified
a) yes b) no

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 9 Uses of Statistical Methods

10. Do you subscribe to the newspaper at home
a) yes b) no

11. Details of amenities at home:

  • cooking gas
  • television
  • bicycle
  • washing machine
  • motorcar
  • scooter
  • refrigerator
  • others

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Index Numbers

Students can Download Chapter 8 Index Numbers Questions and Answers, Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Index Numbers

Plus One Economics Index Numbers One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which of the following is known as cost of living index?
(a) Consumers price index
(b) Wholesale price index
(c) Industrial production index
(d) All the above
Answer:
(a) Consumers price index

Question 2.
Index number can be calculated for ……….
(a) Price
(b) Quantity
(c) Volume
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 3.
In 2017 the price of oil increased by 30% compared to 2010. Identify the base year and the current year.
Answer:
Base year 2010, Current year 2017

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Index Numbers

Question 4.
Which of the following indicates the changes in general price level?
(a) Consumers price index
(b) Wholesale price index
(c) Industrial production index
(d) All the above
Answer:
(b) Wholesale price index

Question 5.
An index number which accounts for the relative importance of the items is known as
(a) weighted index
(b) simple aggregative index
(c) simple average of relatives
(d) all the above
Answer:
(a) weighted index

Question 6.
In most of the weighted index numbers the weight pertains to
(a) base year
(b) current year
(c) both base and current year
(d) none of these
Answer:
(b) current year

Question 7.
The impact of change in the price of a commodity with little weight in the index will be
(a) small
(b) large
(c) uncertain
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) small

Question 8.
A consumer price index measures changes in
(a) retail prices
(b) wholesale prices
(c) producers prices
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) retail prices

Question 9.
The item having the highest weight in consumer price index for industrial workers is
(a) Food
(b) Housing
(c) Clothing
(d) all the above
Answer:
(a) Food

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Index Numbers

Question 10.
In general, inflation is calculated by using
(a) wholesale price index
(b) consumer price index
(c) producers’ price index
Answer:
(a) wholesale price index

Question 11.
What is the other name of the consumer price index?
Answer:
The other name of the consumer price index is price deflator of income.

Question 12.
What is base period?
Answer:
Base period is the reference period with which the current period is compared.

Plus One Economics Index Numbers Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Index numbers are very useful in deflating. Explain.
Answer:
Index numbers are very useful in deflating. They are very useful adjusting original data into real values. For example, money wages can be adjusted for price changes to find out the level of real wages.

Question 2.
Write down the uses of the wholesale price index.
Answer:
The wholesale price index number indicates the change in the general price level. The uses of the wholesale price index are noted down below.

  1. With the help of the wholesale price index, we can estimate the future demand and supply situations
  2. It helps in forecasting future prices
  3. It is used to measure the rate of inflation
  4. It can be used to eliminate the effect of change in price on aggregates such as national income, capital formation, etc.

Question 3.
Define index number.
Answer:
An index number is a statistical device for measuring changes in the magnitude of a group of related variables.

Question 4.
Mention the formula of ‘simple aggregative’ method?
Answer:
\(P_{01}=\frac{\sum P_{1}}{\Sigma P_{0}} \times 100\)
Here,
ΣP = Total of current year’s prices of different commodities.
ΣP0 = Total of base year’s prices of different commodites.

Question 5.
Give utility of index numbers.
Answer:

  1. Index numbers simplify the facts
  2. It is helpful to policymakers
  3. It makes comparative study easy
  4. It helps to study the general trend

Question 6.
Write a short note on Sensex.
Answer:
Sensex is the short form of Bombay Stock Exchange Sensitive Index with 1978 – 79 as base. The value of Sensex is with reference to this period. It consists of 30 stocks represented by 13 sectors of the economy. If Sensex rises, it indicates that the market is doing well and investors expect better earnings on their investment.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Index Numbers

Question 7.
Consumer price indices are of great useful because of various reasons. What are they?
Answer:

  1. They determine the purchasing power of money.
  2. They are helpful in the determination of real wages.
  3. They are helpful in wage negotiations and wage contracts.
  4. They help in deflating income and value series in national accounts.
  5. They help the government in formulation of wage policy, price policy, rent control and making general economic policies.

Plus One Economics Index Numbers Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name some important index number in use.
Answer:
some important index number in use are mentioned below.

  • Consumer price index
  • Wholesale Price Index
  • Industrial production index
  • Producer Price Index
  • Index number of agricultural production

Question 2.
Construct an index number for 1991 taking 1990 as base year.
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Index Numbers img1
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Index Numbers img2
It shows when compared to 1990 the general price level in 1991 increased by 20%.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Index Numbers

Question 3.
Point out the desirable properties of the base year.
Answer:
The desirable properties of base year are:

  • The base year should be a normal year.
  • Extreme values should not be selected as base period.
  • It should not belong to too far in the past.

Plus One Economics Index Numbers Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What are the limitations of index numbers?
Answer:
The limitations of index numbers are mentioned below.

  • Index numbers are not fully true.
  • They do not help in international comparison.
  • They are prepared with certain specific objectives.
  • It is difficult to collect retail prices. So, index numbers based on wholesale prices may be misleading.

Question 2.
“Index number is used in economics for policymaking” substantiate.
Answer:
Wholesale price index number (WPI), consumer price index number (CPI) and industrial production index (IIP) are widely used in policymaking.

1. Consumer index number (CPI) or cost of living index numbers are helpful in wage negotiation, formulation of income policy, price policy, rent control, taxation and general economic policy formulation.

2. The wholesale price index (WPI) is used to eliminate the effect of changes in prices on aggregates such as national income, capital formation, etc.

3. WPI is widely used to measure the rate of inflation. Inflation is a general and continuing increase in prices. If inflation becomes sufficiently large, money may lose its traditional function as a medium of exchange and as a unit of account. Its primary impact lies in lowering the value of money.

4. CPI are used in calculating the purchasing power of money and real wage.

5. Index of industrial production gives us a quantitative figure about the change in production in the industrial sector.

6. Agricultural production index provides us a ready reckoner of the performance of agricultural sector.

7. Sensex is a useful guide for investors in the stock market. If the sensex is rising, investors are optimistic of the future performance of the economy. It is an appropriate time for investment.

Plus One Economics Index Numbers Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Certain important issues should be kept in mind while constructing an index number”. Do agree? Substantiate your answer.
Answer:
Yes, certain important issues should be kept in mind, while constructing an index number. Those issues are mentioned below

1. You need to be clear about the purpose of the index. The calculation of a volume index will be inappropriate when one needs a value index.

2. Besides this, the items are not equally important for different groups of consumers when a consumer price index is constructed. The rise in petrol price may not directly impact the living condition of the poor agricultural labourers.

Thus the items to be included in any index have to be selected carefully to be as representative as possible. Only
then you will get a meaningful picture of the change.

3. Every index should have a base. This base should be as normal as possible. Extreme values should not be selected as base period. The period should also not belong to too far in the past. The comparison of between 1993 and 2005 is much more meaningful than a comparison between 1960 and 2005.

Many items in a 1960 typical consumption basket have disappeared at present. Therefore, the base year for any index number is routinely updated.

4. Another issue is the choice of the formula, which depends on the nature of question to be studied. The only difference between the Laspeyres index and Paasche’s index is the weights used in these formulae.

5. Besides, there are many sources of data with different degrees of reliability. Data of poor reliability will give misleading results. Hence, due care should betaken in the collection of data. If primary data are not being used, then the most reliable source of secondary data should be chosen.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 8 Index Numbers

Question 2.
Explain various types of index numbers.
Answer:
Some Important Index Numbers
1. Consumer price index:
Consumer price index (CPI), also known as the cost of living index, measures the average change in retail prices. The CPI for industrial workers is increasingly considered the appropriate indicator of general inflation, which shows the most accurate impact of price rise on the cost of living of common people.

2. Wholesale price index:
The wholesale price index number indicates the change in the general price level. Unlike the CPI, it does not have any reference consumer category. It does not include items pertaining to services like barber charges, repairing, etc.

3. Industrial production index:
The index number of industrial production measures changes in the level of industrial production comprising many industries. It includes the production of the public and the private sector. It is a weighted average of quantity relatives. In India, it is currently calculated every month with 1993 – 94 as the base.

4. Index number of agricultural production:
The index number of agricultural production is a weighted average of quantity relatives. Its base period is the triennium ending 1981 – 82. In 2003 – 04 the index number of agricultural production was 179.5.

It means that agricultural production has increased by 79.5 percent over the average of the three years 1979 – 80, 1980 – 81 and1981 – 82. Foodgrains have a weight of 62.92 percent in this index.

5. Producer Price Index:
The producer price index number measures price changes from the producers’ perspective. It uses only basic prices including taxes, trade margins, and transport costs.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation

Students can Download Chapter 7 Correlation Questions and Answers, Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation

Plus One Economics Correlation One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Who developed rank correlation co-efficient.
(i) Karl Pearson
(ii) Karl Marx
(iii) Spearman
(iv) None of the above
Answer:
(iii) Spearman

Question 2.
If r= +1, if shows:
(i) Positive correlation
(ii) Perfect positive correlation
(iii) No correlation
(iv) Rank correlation
Answer:
(ii) Perfect positive correlation

Question 3.
If ‘r’ is positive the two variables will more in
(i) Opposite direction
(ii) Inverse direction
(iii) Same direction
(iv) None of the above
Answer:
(iii) Same direction

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation

Question 4.
Which of the following correlation can be used to measure numerically only leniar relationship between two variables?
(i) Karl Pearsons coefficient of correlation
(ii) Spearman correlation
(iii) Rank correlation
(iv) None of the above
Answer:
(i) Karl Pearsons coefficient of correlation

Question 5.
The unit of correlation coefficient between height in feet and weight in kgs is
(i) kg/feet
(ii) percentage
(iii) non-existent
Answer:
(iii) non-existent

Question 6.
The range of simple correlation coefficient is
(i) 0 to infinity
(ii) minus one to plus one
(iii) minus infinity to infinity
Answer:
(ii) minus one to plus one

Question 7.
If rxy is positive the relation between X and Y is of the type.
(i) When Y increases X increases
(ii) When Y decreases X increases
(iii) When Y increases X does not change
Answer:
(i) When Y increases X increases

Question 8.
If rxy = 0 the variable X and Y are
(i) linearly related
(ii) not linearly related
(iii) independent
Answer:
(ii) not linearly related

Question 9.
Of the following three measures which can measure any type of relationship
(i) Karl Pearson’s coefficient of correlation
(ii) Spearman’s rank correlation
(iii) Scatter diagram
Answer:
(iii) Scatter diagram

Question 10.
If precisely measured data are available the simple correlation coefficient is
(i) more accurate than rank correlation coefficient
(ii) less accurate than rank correlation coefficient
(iii) as accurate as the rank correlation coefficient
Answer:
(iii) as accurate as the rank correlation coefficient

Question 11.
Define correlation.
Answer:
Correlation studies and measures the direction and intensity of relationship among variables.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation

Question 12.
Write the formula for calculating correlation.
Answer:
1. Karl Pearson’s coefficient of correlation
\(r=\frac{\sum x y}{\sqrt{\sum x^{2} \times \sum y^{2}}}\)

2. Spearman’s Rank correlation coefficient
\(R=1-\frac{6 \Sigma D^{2}}{N\left(N^{2}-1\right)}\)

Plus One Economics Correlation Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Can r lie outside the -1 and 1 range depending on the type of data?
Answer:
No, r cannot lie outside -1 and 1 range depending on the types of data. It lies between minus one and plus one.

Question 2.
Indicate the kind of relationship between X and Y, if the points of the scatter diagram tend to cluster about.

  1. A straight line sloping upward.
  2. A straight line sloping downward.

Answer:

  1. A straight line sloping upward: it is the case of positive correlation.
  2. A straight line sloping downward: it is the case of negative correlation.

Question 3.
Name the correlation mentioned in the graph.
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img1
Answer:
(a) Positive correlation
(b) Negative correlation
(c) No correlation
(d) Perfect positive correlation
(e) Perfect negative correlation

Question 4.
Give two examples each for positive and negative correlation.
Answer:
1. Positive Correlation

  • Relation between price and supply
  • Relation between height and weight

2. Negative Correlation

  • Relation between price and demand
  • Sale of woolen garment and day temperature

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation

Question 5.
What are perfect correlations? Give examples.
Answer:
Perfect correlation is that where changes in two related variables are exactly proportional. It is of two types:
a) Positive perfect correlation and
b) Negative perfect correlation
There is perfect positive correlation between the two variables of equal proportional changes are in the same direction. It is expressed as +1. If equal proportional changes are in the reverse direction. Then there is negative perfect correlation and it is described as -1.
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img2

Question 6.
Show in scatter diagram the following.

  1. Positive correlation
  2. Negative correlation

Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img3

Plus One Economics Correlation Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Interpret the values for as 1, -1 and 0.
r=1 r = -1 r = 0
Answer:
r as 1 means that there is perfect positive relationship between two variables r as -1 means that there is perfect negative relationship between two variables r as 0 means that there lack correlation between two variables

Question 2.
List some variables where accurate measurement is difficult.
Answer:
The following are some variables where accurate measurement is difficult.

  • Secularism
  • Honesty
  • Beauty
  • Impartiality
  • Patriotism

Question 3.
State the nature of relationship.

  1. sale of woolen garments and the day temperature
  2. amount of rainfall and yield of crop
  3. the colour of dress and intelligence of the lady

Answer:

  1. negative correlation
  2. positive correlation
  3. no correlation

Question 4.
Write down the merits of scatter diagram.
Answer:
Merits of scatter diagram are pointed out below:

  1. It is a very simple method of studying correlation.
  2. Just a glance of the diagram will show the relationship.
  3. It indicates whether the relationship is positive or negative.

Question 5.
Construct a flow chart showing the methods of measuring correlation?
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img4

Question 6.
Illustrate positive correlation and negative correlation.
Answer:
Correlation is commonly classified into negative and positive correlation.
The correlation is said to be positive when the variables move together in the same direction. When the income rises, consumption also rises. When income falls, consumption also falls. For instance, sale of ice-cream and temperature move in the same direction.

The correlation is negative when they move in opposite directions. When the price of apples falls its demand increases. When the prices rise its demand decreases. When you spend more time in studying, chances of your failing decline. These are instances of negative correlation. The variables move in opposite direction.

Question 7.
Calculate the coefficient of correlation from the following data.
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img5
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img6

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation

Question 8.
The following are the ranks obtained by 10 students in two subjects. Calculate Spearman’s rank correlation.

Rank of StatisticsRank of Economics
12
24
31
45
53
69
77
810
96
108

Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img7

Question 9.
Calculate coefficient of correlation using the following data.
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img8
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img9

Plus One Economics Correlation Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What do you mean by Spearman’s rank correlation coefficient? Point out the situations where it is used. Also, bring about its usefulness.
Answer:
Spearman’s rank correlation was developed by the British psychologist C.E. Spearman. It is used when the variables cannot be measured meaningfully as in the case of price, income, weight, etc. The ranking may be more meaningful when the measurements of the variables are suspect.

There are also situations when you are required to quantify qualities such as fairness, honesty, etc. Ranking may be a better alternative to the quantification of qualities. Moreover, sometimes the correlation coefficient between two variables with extreme values may be quite different from the coefficient without the extreme values. Under these circumstances, rank correlation provides a better alternative to simple correlation.

Rank correlation coefficient and simple correlation coefficient have the same interpretation. Its formula has been derived from simple correlation coefficient where individual values have been replaced by ranks. These ranks are used for the calculation of correlation. This coefficient provides a measure of linear association between ranks assigned to these units, not their values. It is the Product Moment Correlation between the ranks.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation

Question 2.
“Correlation Coefficient has certain essential properties”-substantiate.
Answer:
Correlation Coefficient has certain essential properties as discussed below.
1. r has no unit. It is a pure number. It means units of measurement are not part of r. r between height in feet and weight in kilograms, for instance, is 0.7.

2. A negative value of /-indicates an inverse relation. A change in one variable is associated with change in the other variable in the opposite direction. When price of a commodity rises, its demand falls. When the rate of interest rises the demand for funds also falls. It is because now funds have become costlier.

3. If r is positive the two variables move in the same direction. If/”= 0 the two variables are uncorrelated. There is no linear relation between them. However other types of relationships may be there.

4. If r = 1 or r = -1 the correlation is perfect. The relation between them is exact.

5. A high value of r indicates strong linear relationship. Its value is said to be high when it is close to+1 or-1.

6. A low value of r indicates a weak linear relation. Its value is said to be low when it is dose to zero.

7. The value of the correlation coefficient lies between minus one and plus one, -1 < r < +1. If, in any exercise, the value of r \s outside this range indicates error in calculation.

8. The value of r is unaffected by the change of origin and change of scale. Given two variables X and Y let us define two new variables.

Question 3.
Illustrate the following ideas in scatter diagrams.
i. Positive correlation
ii. Perfect positive correlation
iii. Negative correlation
iv. Perfect negative correlation No correlation
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img10
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img11
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 7 Correlation img12

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion

Students can Download Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion Questions and Answers, Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion

Plus One Economics Measures of Dispersion One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Find out the measure of dispersion from the following.
Answer:
(i) Range
(ii) Mean deviation
(iii) Standard deviation
(iv) All the above
Answer:
(iv) All the above

Question 2.
Variance is equal to:
(i) SD
(ii) SD²
(iii) √SD
(iv) SD/2
Answer:
(ii) SD²

Question 3.
Lorenz curve is used to measure
Answer:
(i) Literacy rate
(ii) Unemployment
(iii) Inequality
(iv) None of these
Answer:
(iii) Inequality

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion

Question 4.
Which is the graphical method of determining dispersion?
(i) Range
(ii) Q.D
(iii) S.D
(iv) Lorenz curve
Answer:
(iv) Lorenz curve

Question 5.
Which among the following is not an absolute measure of dispersion?
(i) Range
(ii) Co-efficient of variation
(iii) Mean deviation
(iv) Standard deviation
Answer:
(ii) Co-efficient of variation

Question 6.
Which of the following is the most widely used measure of dispersion?
(i) Range
(ii) Standard deviation
(iii) Mean deviation
(iv) Quartile deviation
Answer:
(ii) Standard deviation

Question 7.
Which of the following is useful in comparing the variability of two or more distributions?
(i) Lorenz Curve
(ii) Standard deviation
(iii) Mean deviation
(iv) Quartile deviation
Answer:
(iii) Mean deviation

Question 8.
Which of the following is not based on all the values?
(i) Mean deviation from mean
(ii) Mean deviation from median.
(iii) Range
(iv) Standard deviation
Answer:
(iii) Range

Question 9.
Mean deviation
(i) is least when calculated from median and higher when calculated from mean.
(ii) is least when calculated from mean and higher when calculated from median.
(iii) same when calculated from median and mean.
(iv) cannot be calculated either from median or mean.
Answer:
(i) is least when calculated from median and higher when calculated from mean.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion

Question 10.
Mention the purpose for which Lorenz Curve is drawn.
Answer:
Lorenz curve is drawn for the presentation of inequality (or dispersion)

Plus One Economics Measures of Dispersion Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Which measure of dispersion is the best and how?
Answer:
Standard deviation is the best measure of dispersion. Because it possesses most of the characteristics of an ideal measure of dispersion.

Question 2.
Range is not based on all the values. Do you agree? Substantiate.
Answer:
Yes, I agree with the statement that range is not based on all the values. It is simply the difference between the largest (L) and the smallest value (S) in a distribution. Therefore, range cannot be considered as a good measure of dispersion.

Question 3.
Give two limitations of range.
Answer:
Given below two limitations of range.

  1. range is unduly affected by extreme values
  2. range is not based on all values.

Question 4.
Differentiate between range and interquartile range.
Answer:
Range is the difference between the value of extreme while interquartile range is the difference between quarter extreme values of the series.

Question 5.
Some measures of dispersion depend upon the spread of values whereas some calculate the variation of values from a central value. Do you agree?
Answer:
Yes, I agree with this statement. Range and quartile deviation measure the dispersion by calculating the spread within which the values lie. That is they de-pend.on the spread of values. On the other hand, mean deviation and standard deviation calculate the variation of value from a central value.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion

Question 6.
Write the merits and demerits of mean deviation.
Answer:
1. Merits

  • It is based on all observations
  • It is less affected by extreme items
  • It is easy to calculate & simple to understand

2. Demerits

  • It ignores + signs
  • It is difficult to compute when
  • or median comes infraction.

Plus One Economics Measures of Dispersion Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Calculate coefficient of standard deviation from the following information SD = 22.4, Mean = 159
Answer:
Coefficient of standard deviation = \(\frac{\mathrm{SD}}{\bar{x}} \times 100\)
\(=\frac{22.4}{159} \times 100=0.14 \times 100=14\)

Question 2.
Following are certain measures of dispersion. Classify them into absolute measures and relative measures.
{Range, Coefficient of variation, Mean Deviation, Coefficient of Quartile Deviation, coefficient of Range, Standard deviation}
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img1

Question 3.
Find odd ones out and justify your answer.

  1. range, quartile deviation, mode, standard deviation
  2. scatter, spread, variation, correlation
  3. Range, Mean Deviation, coefficient of variation, Standard deviation.

Answer:

  1. Mode. Others are methods of studying measures of dispersion.
  2. Correlation. Others are different expressions of dispersion.
  3. Coefficient of variation. Others are absolute measures of dispersion.

Question 4.
Calculate the coefficient of variation, if,
Number of Boys = 72
Average Height = 68
The variance of distribution = 9
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img2

Question 5.
Point out features of good measure of dispersion.
Answer:
The features of a good measure of dispersion are pointed out below:

  • It should be easy to understand
  • It should be simple to calculate
  • It should be rigidly defined
  • It should be based on all observations
  • It should not be affected by extreme values

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion

Question 6.
The size of landholdings of 5 persons are given below:

IndividualsLand in acres
A1.5
B3.0
C0.5
D6.0
E2.0

 

  1. Analyse the data by measuring the dispersion using the easiest method.
  2. What are the drawbacks of that method?

Answer:
1. Range is the simplest method of studying dispersion.
Range = L – S
where L = Largest item
S = Smallest item
Range = 6 – 0.5 = 5.5 acres
2.

  • It is not based on each and every item of the distribution.
  • It is subject to fluctuations from sample to sample.
  • It cannot be computed in case of open-end classes.

Question 7.
If the sum of 10 values is 100 and the sum of their square is 1090, find the coefficient of variation.
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img3

Plus One Economics Measures of Dispersion Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
In a town, 25% of the persons earned more than Rs 45,000 whereas 75% earned more than 18,000. Calculate the absolute and relative values of dispersion.
Answer:
We get the following information from the above.
Q1 = Rs. 18000 and Q3 = Rs. 45000
Absolute measure of dispersion (quartile deviation)
= Q3 – Q1/2 = 45000 – 18000/2
= Rs. 13500
Relative measure of dispersion (coefficient of Q. D)
= Q3-Q1/Q3 + Q1
= 45000 -18000 / 45000 + 18000
= 27000/63000
= 3/7
= 0.43

Question 2.
What do you mean by dispersion? Name the important methods of measuring dispersion.
Answer:
Dispersion is the extent to which values in a distribution differ from the average of the distribution.
To quantify the extent of the variation, there are certain measures namely:

  1. Range
  2. Quartile Deviation
  3. Mean Deviation
  4. Standard Deviation
  5. Lorenz curve

Question 3.
Mention the merits of standard deviation.
Answer:
Merits of standard deviation are:

  1. It is rigidly defined
  2. It is based on all observations
  3. It takes algebraic signs in consideration
  4. It serves the basis of other measures like correlation.

Question 4.
The number of telephone calls received at an exchange in 245 successive one-minute intervals are shown in the following frequency distribution. Compute the mean deviation about the median.

No. of callsFrequency
014
121
225
343
451
540
639
712

Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img4

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion

Question 5.
The coefficient of variation of two series are 58% and 69% and their standard deviation are 21.2 and 15.6. Calculate their mean.
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img5

Question 6.
Calculate the standard deviation.

MarksFrequency
20 – 403
40-806
80-10020
100-12012
120-1409

Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img6

Plus One Economics Measures of Dispersion Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Match the following.

AB
Measures of dispersionKarl Pearson
Standard deviationSD2
Graphical methodSD/mean x 100
VarianceAverage of the second order
Quartile deviationSemi-interquartile range
Coefficient of variationLorenz curve

Answer:

AB
Measures of dispersionAverage of the second order
Standard deviationKarl Pearson
Graphical methodLorenz curve
VarianceSD2
Quartile deviationSemi-inter quartile range
Coefficient of variationSD/mean x 100

Plus One Economics Measures of Dispersion Eight Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What do you mean by Lorenz curve? Give the steps required in the Construction of the Lorenz Curve.
Answer:
The measures of dispersion discussed so far give a numerical value of dispersion. A graphical measure called Lorenz Curve is available for estimating dispersion. In constructing a Lorenz curve, the following steps are involved.

  1. Calculate class mid-points and find cumulative totals
  2. Calculate cumulative frequencies
  3. Express the grand totals and convert the cumulative totals in these columns into percentages,
  4. Now, on the graph paper, take the cumulative percentages of the variable on Y-axis and cumulative percentages of frequencies on X-axis. Thus each axis will have values from ‘0’to ‘100’.
  5. Draw a line joining Co-ordinate (0, 0) with (100,100). This is called the line of equal distribution
  6. Plot the cumulative percentages of the variable with corresponding cumulative percentages of frequency.
  7. Join these points to get the curve OAC.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion

Question 2.
Calculate

  1. standard deviation and
  2. mean deviation

from the following data.
X = 7, 9, 18, 11, 10, 8, 17, 13, 11, 16
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img7
1. Standard deviation
\(s=\sqrt{\frac{\sum d^{2}}{N}}\)
\(=\sqrt{\frac{134}{10}}=3.66\)

2. Median deviation
\(M D=\frac{\Sigma|d|}{N}=\frac{32}{10}=3.2\)

Question 3.
The following table gives the distribution of income of 100 families in a village. Calculate standard deviation.

IncomeNo. of Families
0-100018
1000-200026
2000-300030
3000 – 400012
4000 – 500010
5000 – 60004

Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img8

Question 4.
Write down the formula for finding out various measures of dispersion.
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img9
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img10
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 6 Measures of Dispersion img11

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Students can Download Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency Questions and Answers, Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers helps you to revise the complete Kerala State Syllabus and score more marks in your examinations

Kerala Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Plus One Economics Measures of Central Tendency One Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
The midpoint of the class ‘5-10’ is:
(i) 5
(ii) 7.5
(iii) 10
(iv) 15
Answer:
(ii) 7.5

Question 2.
Mode is equal to:
(i) 3 median – 2 mean
(ii) 2 median – 3 mea
(iii) 3 median – 3 mean
(iv) 3 median -1 mean
Answer:
(i) 3 median – 2 mean

Question 3.
Which of the following is a positional average?
(i) Mean
(ii) Median
(iii) Mode
(iv) All the above
Answer:
(ii) Median

Question 4.
Which of the following divides the data into four equal parts?
(i) decile
(ii) percentile
(iii) quartiles
(iv) none of the above
Answer:
(iii) quartiles

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Question 5.
Which of the following is the most commonly used average?
(i) Arithmetic Mean
(ii) Median
(iii) Mode
(iv) Percentile
Answer:
(i) Arithmetic Mean

Question 6.
Mode can be graphically located by means of
(i) bio diagram
(ii) pie diagram
(iii) histogram
(iv) ogive
Answer:
(iii) histogram

Question 7.
The most suitable average for qualitative measurement is
(i) Arithmetic mean
(ii) Median
(iii) Mode
(iv) Geometric mean
(v) None of the above
Answer:
(ii) Median

Question 8.
Which average is affected most by the presence of extreme items?
(i) median
(ii) Mode
(iii) Arithmetic mean
(iv) Geometric mean
(v) Harmonic mean
Answer:
(iii) Arithmetic mean

Question 9.
The algebraic sum of deviation of a set of n values from A.M. is
(i) n
(ii) 0
(iii) 1
(iv) None of the above
Answer:
(ii) 0

Question 10.
The average value of a given variable is known as ____
Answer:
A.M

Question 11.
Total of given variables can be depicted by _____
Answer:
Σx

Question 12.
Common factor is depicted by ____
Answer:
‘c’

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Question 13.
A.M should be
(i) Simple
(ii) Based on all items
(iii) Rigidly defined
(iv) All the above
Answer:
(iv) All the above

Question 14.
Median is the _____ value in a series.
Answer:
Middle.

Question 15.
Q3 represents ____ Quartile.
Answer:
Middle.

Question 16.
_____ is the division of the series into 100 equal parts.
Answer:
Percentiles.

Question 17.
\(\left(\frac{N+1}{10}\right)^{t h}\) is used to calculate _____.
Answer:
Deciles

Question 18.
Value of median is equal to _____Answer:
Answer:
II Quartile – 50th percentile, 5th Decile

Question 19.
Pick out the odd one out and Justify.
Arithmetic mean, Median, Standard deviation, Mode
Answer:
Standard deviation. Others are measures of central tendency.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Question 20.
Which average would be suitable in the following cases?

  1. Average size of readymade garments.
  2. Average intelligence of students in a class.
  3. Average production in a factory per shift.
  4. Average wages in an industrial concern.
  5. When the sum of absolute deviations from average is least.
  6. When quantities of the variable are in ratios.
  7. In case of open-ended frequency distribution.

Answer:

  1. Mode
  2. Median
  3. Mode or median
  4. Mode or median
  5. Mean
  6. Mode or mean
  7. Median

Plus One Economics Measures of Central Tendency Two Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Name the types of positional averages.
Answer:
Positional averages are median and mode.

Question 2.
Explain weighted Arithmetic mean
Answer:
When calculating Arithmetic means it is important to assign weights to various items according to their importance. The arithmetic mean calculated with the relative importance to different items is known as weighted arithmetic mean.

Question 3.
Give the special features of arithmetic mean.
Answer:
It is interesting to know and useful for checking your calculation that the sum of deviations of items about arithmetic mean is always equal to zero. Symbolically, S (X-X) = 0.However, arithmetic mean is affected by extreme values. Any large value, on either end, can push it up or down.

Question 4.
If median and mean of distribution are respectively 18.8 and 20.2. What would be its made?
Answer:
Mode = 3 Median – 2 Mean
= 3 × 18.8 – 2 × 20.2
= 56.4 – 40.4 = 16

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Question 5.
Mention two demerits of median.
Answer:

  1. Median is not based on all observations
  2. It cannot be given for further mathematical treatment

Question 6.
Give the formulae of median in all series
Answer:
Formulae of Median
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency img 1

Question 7.
If median is 15 and mean is 17, calculate mode?
Answer:
Mode = 3 median – 2 mean
= 3 × 15 – 2 × 17
= 45 – 34 = 11

Question 8.
Can there be a situation where mean, median and mode are equal?
Answer:
Yes. Mean, median and mode will be equal when all given variables are the same.

Question 9.
Mark the missing value of the following data. The mean marks are 10.05.
5, 6, 7, 8, 12, ?, 15, 17, 18, 3, 10 5, 10, 12, 15, 11, 13, 1
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency img 2

Plus One Economics Measures of Central Tendency Three Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
What is the relative position of arithmetic mean, median and mode?
Answer:
Relative position of arithmetic mean, median and mode can be understood from the following narration. Suppose we express,
Arithmetic Mean = Me
Median = Mi
Mode = Mo
The relative magnitude of the three is
Me>Mi>Moor
Me<Mi<Mo
That is the median is always between the arithmetic mean and the mode.

Question 2.
Write down the advantages of median.
Answer:
Merits of median:

  • It is easy to understand
  • It is not affected by extreme values It can be graphically determined
  • It is suitable in case of open-end classes
  • It is suitable for qualitative measurement

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Question 3.
Write the merits of mode.
Answer:
Merits of mode

  • It is easy to understand and simple to calculate
  • It is not affected by extreme values
  • It can be graphically determined
  • It is suitable in case of open-end classes.

Question 4.
Complete the following

  1. ………………. divides the series into two equal parts
  2. The central tendency based on all values is …………..
  3. The average which can be determined through ogive is ………

Answer:

  1. median
  2. mean
  3. median

Question 5.
The mean mark of 60 students in section A are 40 and mean mark if 40 student in section B is 35. Calculate the combined mean of all the students.
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency img 3

Plus One Economics Measures of Central Tendency Four Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Point out important features of a good average.
Answer:
The important features of a good average are given below.

  1. It should be easy to understand
  2. It should be simple to calculate
  3. It should be rigidly defined
  4. It should be based on all observations
  5. It should not be affected by extreme values.
  6. It should be capable for further statistical calculations.

Question 2.
Following information pertains to the daily income of 150 families. Calculate the arithmetic mean.
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency img 4
Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency img 5

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Question 3.
Calculate the median from the following data.

XF
0-105
10-208
20-3010
30-4014
40-503

Answer:
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency img 6

Plus One Economics Measures of Central Tendency Five Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Comment whether the following statements are true or false.

  1. The sum of deviation of items from median is zero.
  2. An average alone is not enough to compare series.
  3. Arithmetic mean is a positional value.
  4. The upper quartile is the lowest value of top 25% of items.
  5. Median is unduly affected by extreme observations.

Answer:

  1. False
  2. True
  3. False
  4. True
  5. False

Question 2.
There are three types of averages. Name them. Also, give appropriate definitions.
Answer:
There are several statistical measures of central tendency or “averages”. The three most commonly used averages are:

  • Arithmetic Mean
  • Median
  • Mode

1. Arithmetic mean:
Arithmetic mean is the most commonly used measure of central tendency. It is defined as the sum of the values of all observations divided by the number of observations

2. Median:
Median is that positional value of the variable which divides the distribution into two equal parts, one part comprises all values greater than or equal to the median value and the other comprises all values less than or equal to it. The Median is the “middle” element when the data set is arranged in order of the magnitude.

3. Mode:
The word mode has been derived from the French word “la Mode” which signifies the most fashionable values of distribution because it is repeated the highest number of times in the series. Mode is the most frequently observed data value. It is denoted by Mo.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Question 3.
What are the merits and demerits of arithmetic mean?
Answer:
1. Merits

  • It is simple to calculate
  • It is regidly defined
  • It is easy to understand
  • It is based on all observations

2. Demerits

  • It is affected by extreme values.
  • It cannot be calculated in open-end series.
  • It cannot be determined graphically.
  • It may sometimes give misleading results.

Plus One Economics Measures of Central Tendency Eight Mark Questions and Answers

Question 1.
Prepare a list of peculiarities of median, quartiles, and percentiles.
Answer:
1. Median

  • The arithmetic mean is affected by the presence of extreme values in the data.
  • If you take a measure of central tendency which is based on middle position of the data, it is not affected by extreme items.
  • Median is that positional value of the variable which divides the distribution into two equal parts, one part comprises all values greater than or equal to the median value and the other comprises all values less than or equal to it.
  • The Median is the middle element when the data set is arranged in order of the magnitude.

2. Quartiles

  • Quartiles are the measures that divide the data into four equal parts; each portion contains equal number of observations. Thus, there are three quartiles.
  • The first Quartile (denoted by Q1) or lower quartile has 25% of the items of the distribution below it and 75% of the items are greater than it.
  • The second Quartile (denoted by Q2) or median has 50% of items below it and 50% of the observations above it.
  • The third Quartile (denoted by Q3) or upper Quartile has75% of the items of the distribution below it and 25% of the items above it.
  • Thus, Q1 and Q3 denote the two limits within which central 50% of the data lies.

3. Percentiles

  • Percentiles divide the distribution into hundred equal parts, so you can get 99 dividing positions denoted by P1 P2, P3, ………., P99.
  • P50 is the median value.
  • If you have secured 82 percentile in a management entrance examination, it means that your position is below 18 percent of total candidates appeared in the examination.

Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency

Question 2.
The daily sales of car of 20 distributing companies is given below. Calculate:

  1. Median, upper quartile and lower quartile.
  2. Interpret the result obtained.

 

Daily SalesNo. of Companies
0-201
20-403
40-609
60-805
80-1002
20

Answer:
1.
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency img 7
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency img 8
Plus One Economics Chapter Wise Questions and Answers Chapter 5 Measures of Central Tendency img 9
2. The median divides the values into two equal parts. Lower quartile (Q1) divides the values into 1/4 and upper quartile (Q3) divides the values into 3/4.